Menu

1 John 2:8 — Word Study

Depth

N1904πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

BSAAgainpalin [once more, a second time] a commandmententolē [divine instruction, order from God] newkainos [fresh, recently given] I am writinggraphō to yousu whichhos, hē iseimi truealēthēs [genuine, authentic] inen Himautos [Jesus Christ, the Son of God] andkai inen you,su [as believers, followers of Christ] becausehoti theho darknessskotia [lack of spiritual understanding, ignorance] is passing awayparagō [passing away, disappearing] andkai theho lightphōs [spiritual illumination, enlightenment] <the>ho truealēthinos [real, genuine] alreadyēdē [even now, at this moment] shines.phainō [radiating, illuminating]

Word
Listen & take away1 John 2
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 8 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (phainō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
1 John 2:8quick helps
In a sentenceJohn emphasizes a new commandment that is true in both Christ and believers, highlighting the fading darkness and the shining light.
Who is speakingJohn, addressing the community of believers.
Where we areThis verse is part of a discussion on love and light, found in the context of 1 John.
The hard wordἐντολὴν
Take awayThe commandment is both new and ancient, reflecting a truth that transforms lives.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectὅς verbγράφω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — 1 John 2:8

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The New Commandmentgenerated

7Beloved, I am not writing to you a new commandment, but an old one, which you have had from the beginning. This commandment is the message you have heard.
8Then again, I am also writing to you a new commandment, which is true in Him and also in you. For the darkness is fading and the true light is already shining.
9If anyone claims to be in the light but hates his brother, he is still in the darkness.
10Whoever loves his brother remains in the light, and there is no cause of stumbling in him.

1 John 2:8 is part of a larger conversation about love and the nature of the Christian life. John writes to remind believers of the significance of loving one another, which is a reflection of Christ's love. This new commandment is not just a repetition but a fresh expression of God's will, true in both Christ and His followers. The context emphasizes the contrast between darkness and light, illustrating the transformative power of love in the believer's life.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
11 John 4:21And we have this commandment from Him: Whoever loves God must love his brother as well.
2John 13:34A new commandment I give you: Love one another. As I have loved you, so you also must love one another.
3John 15:12This is My commandment, that you love one another as I have loved you.
41 John 3:14–16We know that we have passed from death to life, because we love our brothers. The one who does not love remains in death.
51 John 4:11Beloved, if God so loved us, we also ought to love one another.

The Key Word ἐντολὴν, entolēgenerated

The Greek word ἐντολή (*entolē*) means 'commandment' and refers specifically to divine instructions given by God. It is derived from the verb ἐντέλλω, which means to command or order. This term is frequently used in the New Testament, especially in relation to the teachings of Jesus and the Mosaic law.

In this verse, the commandment is described as new, indicating that it holds fresh significance for believers. The parsing shows it is a feminine noun in the accusative case, suggesting it is the direct object of the verb in this context, emphasizing the action of writing a commandment.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

In this study, we analyze the verse as it appears in the Berean Standard Bible (BSB), which uses the phrase a new commandment. Other translations, such as the KJV and ASV, also maintain this wording, emphasizing the commandment's newness.

Where translations differ is primarily in the rendering of ἐντολὴν. While most versions like the BSB and KJV use commandment, others like the YLT use command, reflecting slight variations in emphasis.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main clause is governed by the verb γράφω, I am writing, with several phrases hanging off it: an indirect object indicating to whom John is writing, a relative clause describing the commandment, and a reason clause explaining the significance of the commandment.

The structure includes a subject-predicate relationship where the commandment is affirmed as true, linking it to both Christ and the believers. The conjunctions and prepositions help clarify the relationships between these elements, showing how the commandment connects to the themes of light and darkness.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἐντολή appears in the Septuagint as a translation of the Hebrew word מִצְוָה, which also means 'commandment.' This connection emphasizes the continuity of God's instructions from the Old Testament to the New.

The use of ἐντολή in the New Testament reflects the ongoing relevance of God's commandments, highlighting their importance in the life of believers.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

1 John 2:8 teaches that John is writing a new commandment that is true in Jesus and in believers. It points out that darkness is fading and the true light is shining, emphasizing the importance of love in the Christian life.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does the new commandment refer to?

The new commandment refers to the call to love one another, as Jesus taught, which is a central theme in John's writings.

How is the darkness described in this verse?

The darkness is described as fading, indicating that ignorance and spiritual blindness are being replaced by the light of Christ.

Why is the commandment considered new?

The commandment is considered new because it is a fresh expression of God's will, emphasizing love as the defining characteristic of the Christian community.

What does it mean that the true light is shining?

The true light shining refers to the presence of Christ and the illumination He brings to believers, guiding them in truth and love.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. How can I demonstrate love in my daily interactions with others?
  2. In what ways have I experienced the light of Christ in my life?
  3. What steps can I take to move from darkness to light in my understanding of God's commands?
  4. How does the new commandment challenge me to live differently as a believer?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers comment on this verse, interpreting its implications for Christian living and the nature of divine commandments.

Clement of AlexandriaFrom the Latin Translation of Cassiodorus c. 150–215
"This is the commandment; for the darkness" of perversion, that is, "has passed away, and, lo, the true light has already shone," - that is, through faith, through knowledge, through the Covenant working in men, through prepared judgments.
Early Church Fathers on 1 John 2 →
TertullianOn Modesty c. 155–220
Nay, but this whole world is the one house of all; in which world it is more the heathen, who is found in darkness, whom the grace of God enlightens, than the Christian, who is already in God's light.
Early Church Fathers on 1 John 2 →
Hilary of ArlesINTRODUCTORY COMMENTARY ON 1 JOHN c. 403–449
The commandment is true in him because he loved us so much that he died for us, and it will be true in us also if we love one another.
Early Church Fathers on 1 John 2 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on 1 John 2:8 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Again, a new commandment I write unto you,.... Which is the same with the former, considered in different respects.

Read John Gill on 1 John 2 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Again, a new commandment I write unto you, which thing is true in him and in you: because the darkness is past, and the true light now shineth. A new commandment.

Read Robert Jamieson on 1 John 2 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Yet also he calls it a new commandment, as our Saviour did, , upon the subjoined accounts. Which thing is true; i.e. evident, or verified, fulfilled, exemplified. In him; viz. in that new and high demonstration he had given of the sincerity and greatness of his own love, laying down his life for us, as . And in you; or, us, (as some read), i.e. the mind of God herein is by a new and fresh light most evidently and gloriously signified in or among you, (the subject being here collective and plural, admits this varied and very usual sense of the particle in), inasmuch as the darkness is past; i.e. the heathenish ignorance that made the world barbarous; a darkness in which the furious lusts and…

Read Matthew Poole on 1 John 2 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

8 Again, a new commandment I write unto you, which thing is true in him and in you: because the darkness is past, and the true light now shineth. Ver. 8. A new commandment] "A new commandment" it is called, saith a late learned interpreter, 1. Because it was renewed by the Lord after it had been as it were antiquated, and almost extinguished. 2. Because it was commanded to such men as were new or renewed. 3. Because it was an excellent commandment.

Read John Trapp on 1 John 2 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(5) The fourth inference from the doctrine that God is Light analyses more accurately the general expression of 1 John 1:7, walking in the light. If Christ is, as in 1 John 2:1-2, the Paraclete and Propitiation of the world, it becomes necessary to ascertain whether He is this to us; lest, when this salvation is offered, we condemn ourselves by rejecting it. The test is, “obedience to the commandments, especially in brotherly love.” (3) Hereby means, by what follows.That we know him.—Rather, have known Him (so also in 1 John 2:4, I have known Him); that we have not grasped a shadow, but have been in intercourse with the living God, who reveals Himself not through speculation, but through a…

Read Charles John Ellicott on 1 John 2 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 8. Which thing is true in him and in you] It is true that Christ loved the world so well as to lay down his life for it; and it was true in them, in all his faithful followers at that time, who were ready to lay down their lives for the testimony of Jesus. There is a saying in Synopsis Sohar, p. 94, n. 51, that may cast some light on this passage: That way in which the just have walked, although it be OLD, yet may be said to be NEW in the love of the righteous. The love that the righteous bear to God and to each other is a renewal of the commandment. The darkness is past] The total thick darkness of the heathen world, and the comparative darkness of the Mosaic dispensation, are now…

Read AdamClarke on 1 John 2 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

8. Again, a new commandment I write unto you, which thing is true] Or, Again, as a new commandment I write unto you a thing which is true. Or, Again, a new commandment write I unto you, namely that which is true. It is difficult to decide between these three renderings; but the third is simpler than the first. Both Tyndale and the Genevan Version have ‘a thing that is true’. If we adopt the rendering of A. V. and R. V., the meaning seems to be, that the newness of the commandment is true, both in the case of Christ, who promulgated it afresh, and in the case of you, who received it afresh. If we prefer the simpler rendering, the meaning will be, that what has already been shewn to be true…

Read Cambridge on 1 John 2 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Again, a new commandment I write unto you - “And yet, that which I write to you, and particularly enjoin on you, deserves in another sense to be called a new commandment, though it has been also

Read Albert Barnes on 1 John 2 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Then again, I am also writing to you a new commandment, which is true in Him and also in you. For the darkness is fading and the true light is already shining.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Again, I write a new commandment to you, which is true in him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the true light already shines.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Then again, I am also writing to you a new commandment, which is true in Him and also in you. For the darkness is fading and the true light is already shining.

NETBNew English Translation2006

On the other hand, I am writing a new commandment to you which is true in him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the true light is already shining.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Again, a new commandment I write unto you, which thing is true in him and in you: because the darkness is past, and the true light now shineth.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

Again, a new commandment write I unto you, which thing is true in him and in you; because the darkness is passing away, and the true light already shineth.

RVARevised Version, American1894

Again, a new commandment write I unto you, which thing is true in him and in you; because the darkness is passing away, and the true light already shineth.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Again, a new commandment I write to you, which thing is true in him and in you: because the darkness is past, and the true light now shineth.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Againe, a new comandement I write vnto you, that which is true in him, and also in you: for the darkenes is past, and that true light now shineth.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

Again, I write a new commandment to you, which thing is true in him and in you, because the darkness is passing and the true light already shines.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

again, a new command I write to you, which thing is true in him and in you, because the darkness doth pass away, and the true light doth now shine;

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

again, a new command I write to you, which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away, and the true light now shines;

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Yet I am writing a new commandment to you, which is true in Christ and in you, because the darkness is passing away, and the true light is already shining.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Again a new commandment I write unto you, which thing is true both in him and in you; because the darkness is passed, and the true light now shineth.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

But in a sense I am giving you a new commandment. Its truth is revealed in Jesus and in you, for the darkness is coming to an end and the true light is already shining.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Again, I give you a new law, which is true in him and in you; for the night is near its end and the true light is even now shining out.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἐντολὴνentolē a commandment G1785 2 different renderings
commandmentASV BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
commandLSV YLT
γράφωgraphō I am writing G1125 3 different renderings
i writeDBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB WEB YLT
writeASV RVA
i am writingNETB ULB
ἀληθὲςalēthēs true G227 2 different renderings
trueASV BBE BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
truthFBV
παράγεταιparagō is passing away G3855 2 different renderings
is passing awayASV LSV NETB RVA ULB WEB
passingDBY
ἤδηēdē already G2235 3 different renderings
alreadyASV BSB DBY FBV MSB NETB RVA ULB WEB
nowDRA GNV KJV LSV NWB YLT
even nowBBE
φαίνει.phainō shines. G5316 2 different renderings
shiningBBE BSB FBV MSB NETB ULB
shinesDBY LSV WEB

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseclauseadverbialπάλινAgainnoun phrase · objectἐντολὴνa commandmentκαινὴνnewverbγράφωI am writingindirect objectὑμῖνto youclausesubjectwhichlinking verbἐστινispredicateἀληθὲςtrueprepositional phrase · adverbialprepositional phraseἐνinαὐτῷHimκαὶandprepositional phraseἐνinὑμῖνyouclauseὅτιbecauseclauseclausenoun phrase · subjecttheσκοτίαdarknessverbπαράγεταιis passing awayκαὶandclausenoun phrase · subjectτὸthenoun phraseφῶςlightnoun phraseτὸ-ἀληθινὸνtrueadverbialἤδηalreadyverbφαίνειshines

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Iterum mandatum novum scribo vobis, quod verum est et in ipso, et in vobis : quia tenebræ transierunt, et verum lumen jam lucet.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܬܘܒ ܦܘܩܕܢܐ ܚܕܬܐ ܟܬܒ ܐܢܐ ܠܟܘܢ ܗܘ ܕܐܝܬܘܗܝ ܫܪܝܪܐ ܒܗ ܘܒܟܘܢ ܕܚܫܘܟܐ ܥܒܪ ܠܗ ܘܢܘܗܪܐ ܫܪܝܪܐ ܫܪܝ ܡܬܚܙܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

πάλιν ἐντολὴν καινὴν γράφω ὑμῖν ἐστιν ἀληθὲς ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι σκοτία παράγεται καὶ τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀληθινὸν ἤδη φαίνει.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse all agree
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

1 John 2:8πάλινAgainAgainπάλινἐντολήa commandmea commandmentἐντολήκαινόςnewnewκαινόςγράφωI am writinI am writingγράφωσύto youto youσύὅςwhichwhichὅςεἰμίisisεἰμίἀληθήςtruetrueἀληθήςἐνininἐναὐτόςHimHimαὐτόςκαίandandκαίἐνininἐνσύyou,you,σύὅτιbecausebecauseὅτιthetheσκοτίαdarknessdarknessσκοτίαπαράγωis passing is passing awayπαράγωκαίandandκαίthetheφῶςlightlightφῶς<the><the>ἀληθινόςtruetrueἀληθινόςἤδηalreadyalreadyἤδηφαίνωshines.shines.φαίνωσκότοςn.m. & n.nn.m. & n.n. darσκότοςἐντέλλομαιv. I give v. I give orderἐντέλλομαιἄλφαletter theletter the firsἄλφαεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκπαράPrep. fromPrep. from, in παράἀληθήςAdj unconcAdj unconcealedἀληθήςDisj.prt. Disj.prt. or, tπάληn.f. a wren.f. a wrestlinπάληνέοςAdj young,Adj young, new,νέοςArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦὅστιςRel.pr. whRel.pr. whosoevὅστιςφημίv. I sayv. I sayφημίφῶςn.n. lightn.n. light, a sφῶςἀμήνHebr. veriHebr. verily, tἀμήν
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in 1 John 2:8

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
πάλινpalin Again G3825 Adverb
141× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in 1 John than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Again or once more is what this word means. It is used in many places in the Bible, like Matthew 4:8 and John 1:35, to indicate that something is happening again or that something should be done again.
Amplified meaning
once more, a second time
Tyndale gloss
again
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πάλιν (*palin*) is an adverb meaning 'again' or 'back.' It encompasses both spatial and temporal contexts, indicating a return to a previous position or the repetition of an action. In the New Testament, it appears in various verses, such as Matthew 4:8 and John 1:35. The lexicons note its use for both literal and rhetorical purposes, but there is no significant disagreement among them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πάλιν, adv.,

[in LXX for שׁוּב, etc.;]

of place, back, backwards (LS, s.v.).

Of time, again, once more: Mt 4:8, Mk 2:13, Lk 23:20, Jo 1:35 (and freq.), Ac 17:32, Ro 11:23, Ga 1:9, He 1:6, al; pleonastically, π. ἀνακάμπτειν, Ac 18:21; ὑποστρέφειν, Ga 1:17; εἰς τὸ π., II Co 13:2; π. ἐκ τρίτου (Bl., § 81, 4),

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πάλιν, adv.,fr. Hom. down; 1. anew, again, [but the primary meaning seems to be back; cf. (among others) Ellendt, Lex. Soph. 8. v. ii. p. 485]; a. joined to verbs of all sorts, it denotes renewal or repetition of the action: Mt. ἵν. 8; xx.5; xxi. 36; xxii.1,4; Mk. ii. 13; iii. 20; Lk. xxiii. 20; Jn. i. 35; iv. 13 ; viii. 2, 8, 12, 21; ix. 15,17; x.19; Acts xvii. 32; xxvii. 28; Ro. xi. 23; 1 Co. vii. 5; 2Co. xi.16; Gal.i.9; 11.18; iv. 19; 2 Pet. ii. 20; Phil. ii. 28; iv.4; Heb.i. 6 (where πάλιν is tacitly opposed to the time when God first brought his Son into the world, i. e. to the time of Jesus’ former life on earth) ; Heb. v.12; vi.1,6; Jas. v.18; Rev. x. 8, 11; πάλιν μικρόν se. ἔσται, Jn. xvi. 16 sq. 19; εἰς τὸ πάλιν, again (cf. Germ. zum wiederholten Male; [see eis, A. II. 2 fin.]), 2 Co. xiii. 2; with verbs of going, coming, departing, returning, where again combines with the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πάλιν, an adverbial acc. like δίκην, μάτην, χάριν, originally meaning ‘‘back,’’ return to a previous position, in later Greek came to be used rather in the sense of ‘‘ again,” repetition of a previous action. Exx. are P Tebt I. 58°? (B.C. 111) πάλιν προσεντέλλομαί σοι προσεδρεῦσαι, “1 again bid you be in attendance”’ (Edd.), P Fay 122! (¢. A.D. 100) ἕως ἀπολαβὼν τὸ λοιπὸν THs τιμ[ἢ]ς πάλιν σοι γράψω, “until I get the remainder of the price and write to you again” (Edd.), PSI IV. 299! (ili/A.D. εὔχομαι τ]ῷ θεῷ ἕως οὗ ἄν pe πάλιν πρὸς ὑμᾶς εὐοδώσῃ, “1 pray God until he again gives me a prosperous return to you,” P Oxy παλινγενεσία 4 XII. 1490° (late iii/a.p.) εἰ οὖν πάλιν δύνῃ ἐκπλέξαι παρὰ σεαυτῷ, τύχῃ τῇ ἀγαθῇ, “if then you can again get him off by yourself (Ὁ), good luck to you” (Edd.), and P Gen I. 532° (iv/A.D.) ἐγὼ πάλιν σὸς δοῦλος εἰμεὶ καὶ οὐκ ἀποστατίσωμαί (= ἡσομαί) σου ὡς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πάλιν (palin) — again.

πάλῐν [ᾰ],

poetry also πάλι (q.see), adverb

1. of Place, back, backwards (the usual sense in early Epic dialect), mostly joined with Verbs of going, coming, etc.; π. χώρει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ἐλεύσεται, κατελθεῖν, ἐπανέλθωμεν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δεῦρο σωθήσῃ π. [Refs]; δόμεναι π. give back, restore, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἀγκαλέσαι to call back, [Refs 4th c.BC+] she turned back from her son, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: coupled with other adverbs, π. αὖτις ἔβαινον νηὸς ἐπὶ γλαφυρῆς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὖ π. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄψορρον π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. οἴκαδε, π. οἴκαδ᾽ αὖ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with the Article, ἡ π. ὁδός [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πάλιν

palin

probably from the same as 3823 (through the idea of oscillatory

repetition); (adverbially) anew, i.e. (of place) back, (of time) once

more, or (conjunctionally) furthermore or on the other hand:--again.

see GREEK for 3823

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πάλιν

Adv

again, further, on the other hand

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πάλιν palin 141x

pr. back; again, back again, Jn. 10:17; Acts 10:16; 11:10; again by repetition, Mt. 26:43; again in continuation, further, Mt. 5:33; 13:44, 45, 47, 18:19; again, on the other hand, 1 Jn. 2:8

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πάλιν of Place, back, backwards, Hom., Hes., etc.; π. χωρέειν Hdt.; π. ἔρχεσθαι Aesch., etc.; also, πάλιν δοῦναι to give back, restore, Il.:—c. gen., πάλιν τράπεθ᾽ υἷος ἑοῖο she turned back from her son, id. Il.; πάλιν κίε θυγατέρος ἧς id. Il.;—also πάλιν αὖτις back again, αὖτε πάλιν, ἂψ π., π. ὀπίσσω, etc.

with a notion of contradiction, πάλιν ἐρεῖν to gain say (i. e. say against), Il.; but, μῦθον πάλιν λάζεσθαι to take back one's word, unsay it, id. Il.; opp. to ἀληθέα εἰπεῖν, Od.: in Prose, contrariwise, Plat.: —c. gen., τὸ πάλιν νεότητος youth's opposite, Pind.; χρόνου τὸ πάλιν the change of time, Eur.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

a-gen': Advb. denoting repetition; in New Testament, generally for palin, "back," "once more." Occasionally, it has the force of a connective, synonymous with "moreover," as in Ro 15:10 ff; 1Co 3:20, etc. The expression "born again" of the King James Version, Joh 3:3,7; 1Pe 1:23, translating the Greek "anothen" and "ana" in composition, becomes in the Revised Version (British and American) "anew," i.e. "over again." As these particles mean "from above" and "up," their use as indicating repetition is sometimes disputed, but without further foundation than that "again" does not exhaust the meaning.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%again
again99% · 144×other renderings1% · 1×

145 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 141 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώἸουδαῖοςJewishδοξάζωI glorify, honor
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςὄρθροςearly dawn, day-
οὖνtherefore, then
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goἸησοῦςJesus
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article theδέbut, on the othe
αὐτός
ἀφίημιI send away, relοὖνtherefore, thenλέγωI say, speak
πάλινAgain141×
what comes after →
λέγωI say, speak
μήNegἐνArticle the
εἰς
Article theΚαφαρναούμPropσυναγωγήan assembly, con
Article the
ὄχλοςa crowdμαθητήςa learner, disciδώδεκαIndec
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oArticle the
οὖνtherefore, then
αὐτόςἐρωτάωI ask, question,ἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπάλιν · 141× in the New Testament
John Mark Matthew Hebrews Galatians 2 Corinthians Acts Romans 1 Corinthians Luke Philippians Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 35 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.7c. AD 100

λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC
PSI 6 575Alexandria252 BC

ἐμνήσθην σοι καὶ πρότερον ἐν πόλει ὑπὲρ Ἑρμογένους τινὸς τῶν κληρούχων, ᾤμην δὲ δεῖν πάλιν ὑπομνῆσαί σε. καλῶς ἂν οὖν ποιήσαις, ὡς ἄν σοι ἀποδῶι τὴν ἐπιστολήν, γνωριμώτερόν σε

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59442Alexandria (?)276 BC–227 BC

ς σοι παραδῶι μετὰ φιλίας κα … μαν παρʼ αὐτοῦ παῖδα πάλιν ἀνακεχωρηκέναι … πράγματα ἔχων ὅπως καταγάγω αὐτόν· οὐ γὰρ … καὶ Αἰνησίδημον ἀξιώσω τοῦ

P.Cair. Zen. 4 59621Arsinoites (?)249 BC–240 BC

παρασχέσθαι μαρτυροῦντας αὐτῆι εναμ … … ἐρημοῦμαι δὲ καὶ ἐγὼ μαρτυρίας περὶ τούτων, ὅπως πάλιν διακούσας … … ους, ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἐνδείξηται, εἶναι τὴν οἰκίαν ἐμήν , ἵνα

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ἐντολὴνentolē a commandment G1785 Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
67× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means 'commandment', referring to a divine instruction or order, as seen in Luke 15:29 and John 10:18. It is about following God's rules. Jesus taught that the greatest commandment is to love God and love others.
Amplified meaning
divine instruction, order from God
Tyndale gloss
commandment
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐντολή (i.e., *entolē*) means a command, injunction, or order, often used in a religious context to refer to God's commandments. It is derived from the verb ἐντέλλω and appears frequently in the New Testament, particularly in relation to the Mosaic law and the teachings of Christ. Notably, it is used in verses like Matthew 5:19 and John 14:15.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐντολή, -ῆς, ἡ

(< ἐντέλλω, q.v.),

[in LXX chiefly for מִצְוָה; in pl. freq. in Pss for פִּקּוּדִים ;]

generally, a charge, injunction, order, command: Lk 15:29, Jo 10:18 11:57 12:49, 50 14:31, Ac 17:15, Col 4:10; ἐ. σαρκίνη, He 7:16, 18

Esp. of religious precepts and commandments;

of God's commandments: in OT, Mt 15:3 22:36, 38, 40 ; Mk 10:5, 19 12:28, 31 Eph 2:15, He 9:19; esp. of the decalogue,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐντολή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ἐντέλλω Or ἐντέλλομαι, 4. v-), fr. Pind. and Hdt. down; Sept. often for ΤῚΝ, in the Pss. the plur. ἐντολαΐ also for Dpa; an order, command, charge, precept ; 1. univ. a charge, injunction: Lk. xv. 29; ἐντολὴν λαμβάνειν παρά τινος, Jn. x. 18; πρός τινα, Acts XVii. 15; λαβεῖν ἐντολὰς περί τινος, Col. iv. 10; that which is prescribed to one by reason of his office, ἐντολὴν ἔχειν foll. by inf., Heb. vii. 5; ἐντολὴν διδόναι τινί, Jn. xiv. 31 LTr WH; with τί εἴπῃ added, of Christ, whom God commanded what to teach to men, Jn. xii. 49; ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ, of God, respecting the same thing, vs. 50. 2. a commandment, i. e. a prescribed rule in accordance with which a thing is done; a. univ. ἐντολὴ σαρκική [-ἰνη ἃ LT Tr WH], a precept relating to lineage, Heb. vii. 16; of the Mosaic precept concerning the priesthood, Heb. vii. 18; of a magistrate’s order or edict: ἐντολὴν διδόναι…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐντολή is used of a royal ‘‘ ordinance” of Euergetes IT. in P Tebt I. 610 (B.C. 140) broreTaxa]pev δὲ Kal τῆς παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως[καὶ τῶν βασιλισσῶν παραδεδοἸμένης περὶ τῶν ἀνηκόντων [τοῖς ἱεροῖς κομίζεσθαι ἐϊντολῆς τὸ ἀντίγραφον, and in Par 6518 (B.c. 146), the writer, after informing Ptolemy Philometor that he had executed certain instructions regarding Egyptian contracts, adds— μὲν ἐντολὴ ἐγδέδοται ἡμῖν els τὴν A τοῦ ᾿Αθύρ: cf. P Lille I. 385 (c. B.c. 240) ἐν(τολὴ) τοῖς ἐλαιοκαπήλοις, ‘‘ circulaire aux revendeurs ᾿᾿ (Ed.). From Roman times we may cite the reference to Imperial ordinances —tats θειαῖς ἐντολαῖς in an inscr. from Bulgaria, Sy// 418°4 (a.D. 238) : cf. τ Cor 719 αἱ. Other more general exx. are P Ryl II. 812 (the letter of an official—c. A.D. 104) μεμνῆσ[θαί μΊου τῆς yevopevy[s] αὐτῷ ἐντολῆς, BGU 11. 6008 (ii/ili A.D.) ἐνμένω πᾶσι ταῖς προγεγραμέν[α7ις [ἐν]τολαῖς [κ]αθὼς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐντολή (entolē) — commandment.

ἐντολ-ή, ἡ,

injunction, order, command, frequently in plural, orders, commands, [NT+5th c.BC+]; ἐντολὰς δοῦναι Decrees cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; royal ordinance, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; θεῖαι ἐ., of Imperial ordinances, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; ἀπ᾽ ἐντολῆς by proxy, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —Rare in Trag. and _Attic dialect_ Prose.

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐντολή

entole

from 1781; injunction, i.e. an authoritative

prescription:--commandment, precept.

see GREEK for 1781

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐντολή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

an ordinance, injunction, command

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐντολή entolē 67x

an injunction; a precept, commandment, law, Mt. 5:19; 15:3, 6; an order, direction, Acts 17:15; an edict, Jn. 11:57; a direction, Mk. 10:5; a commission, Jn. 10:18, a charge of matters to be proclaimed or received, Jn. 12:49, 50; 1 Tim. 6:14; 2 Pet. 2:21

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐντολή ἐντολή, ἡ, ἐντέλλω an injunction, order, command, behest, Hdt., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
58%commandment
commandment58% · 40×commandments35% · 24×command3% · 2×other renderings4% · 3×

69 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object55%subject24%adverbial16%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 67 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
τηρέωI keep, guard, oκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
εἰμίI am, exist
ποῖοςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mastὅστις
λαμβάνωI receive, take
καίand, even, also,ὅςἱερατείαthe duty of a pr
ποῖοςIrg
διδάσκαλοςa teacher
πρῶτοςfirst, before
καίand, even, also,
ἐντολήa commandment67×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐμόςἁμαρτίαa sin
αὐτός
τηρέωI keep, guard, oζωήlifeμήNeg
καινόςfresh, new
γράφωI writeδίδωμιI offer, give
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,τηρέωI keep, guard, o
οὗτος
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐντολή · 67× in the New Testament
1 John John Romans Matthew Mark 2 John Hebrews Luke 1 Corinthians 2 Peter Ephesians Revelation
Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 101 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.93c. AD 40

πρόσταξις, ἀπαγόρευσις, ἐντολὴ καὶ παραίνεσις·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.43c. AD 75–95

καὶ παρακρούεται μὲν οὕτω τὴν γυναῖκα τῆς ἐντολῆς τοῦ θεοῦ καταφρονῆσαι·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.11c. AD 100

ἐφ̓ ὅσον ἐστὶν ἐν ἡμῖν, μελετῶμεν τὸν φόβον τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ φυλάσσειν ἀγωνιζώμεθα τὰς ἐντολὰς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα ἐν τοῖς δικαιώμασιν αὐτοῦ εὐφρανθῶμεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 37Pathyris109 BC

τὰ βασιλικὰ πραγματευομένοις χαίρειν. πρὸς τῆι οἰκονομίαι τῆς κώμης καθέσταται Πατσεοῦς Πατῆτος ὁ τὴν ἐντολὴν ἐπιδεικνὺς χειρογραφήσας ὡς εἴθισται καὶ διαστολὴν λαβὼν προ

P.Flor. 2 190Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 252

ὀνηλάτου κτηνῶν πέντε ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ θ σὺν διχώροις ιϛ ἁπλᾶ μονόχωρα λβ ἐξ ἐντολῆς τοῦ ἀξιολογωτάτου εὐσχήμονος ὧν μοι πέμψον γράμματα. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὔχομαι τιμιώτατε ἔτους γ Θὼθ

P.Flor. 2 240Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 252

χαίρειν. ὡς ἠθέλησεν ὁ ἀξιολογώτατος εὐσχήμων ἐν Ταλει ὧν τῇ τρυγῇ μετεπέμψατό με καὶ ἐντολὰς ἔσχον πέμψαι σοι οἴνου μονόχωρα ρκ ἀφʼ ὧν ἔπεμψά σοι ἐπὶ λόγου διὰ μὲν

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
καινὴνkainos new G2537 Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
42× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means new or fresh, like something that has not been used before. It is used in Matthew 9 and 2 Corinthians 5 to describe a new heart or a new creation.
Amplified meaning
fresh, recently given
Tyndale gloss
new
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καινός (kainos) means new or fresh, often in terms of quality rather than age. It contrasts with παλαιός (palaios), which means old or antiquated. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like new wine (Mt 9:17) and the new covenant (Lk 22:20). The lexicons note a distinction between καινός and νέος (neos), with the former emphasizing freshness and the latter focusing on recentness.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — νέος, καινός from a scan

Some have denied that any difference can in the N. T. be traced between these words. They derive a certain plausible support for this denial from the fact that manifestly νέος and καινός, both rendered ‘new’ in our Version, are often interchangeably used; thus νέος ἄνθρωπος (Col. iii. 10), and καινὸς ἄνθρωπος (Eph. ii. 15), in both cases “ the 1 Our English ‘ world,’ etymologically regarded, more nearly represents αἰών than κόσμος. The old ‘ weralt’ (in modern German ‘ welt’) is composed of two words, ‘wer,’ man, and ‘alt,’ age or generation. The ground-meaning, therefore, of ‘weralt’ is generation of men (Pott. Etym. Forsch. vol. ii, pt. i. p. 125). Out of this expression of time unfolds itself that of space, as αἰών passed into the meaning of κόσμος (Grimm, Deutsche Myth. p. 752); but in the earliest German records ‘ weralt’ is used, first as an expression of time, and only…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καινός, -ή, -όν,

[in LXX (Ez 11:19, al.) for חָדָשׁ, exc. Is 65:15 (אַחֵר);]

of that which is unused or unaccustomed, new in respect to form or quality, fresh, unused, novel: opp. to παλαιός, ἀρχαῖος, Mt 9:17 13:52, Mk 2:21, 22, Lk 5:36, 38, II Co 5:17, Eph 4:24; πλήρωμα, Mk 2:21; μνημεῖον, Mt 27:60, Jo 19:41; διαθήκη (T, WH, R, txt., omit), Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καινός, -7, -ov; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; Sept. for wan; new, i. e. a. as respects form; recenily made, fresh, recent, unused, unworn (opp. to παλαιός old, antiquated) : as ἀσκός, Mt. ix. 17; Mk. ii. 22 (Tom. Tr WH br. the cl.]; Lk. v. 88 ; ἱμάτιον, Lk. v. 36; πλήρωμα, Mk. ii. 21; μνημεῖον, Mt. xxvii. 60; with ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἐτέθη added, Jn. xix. 413; καινὰ x. παλαιά, Mt. xiii. 52; new, which as recently made is superior to what it succeeds: διαθήκη, Mt. xxvi. 28 (Τ᾿ WH om. caw.) ; Mk. xiv. 24 RL; Lk. xxii. 20 (WH reject the pass.) ; 1 Co. xi. 25; 2Co. iii. 6; Heb. viii. 8,13; ix. 15, (Jer. xxxviil. (xxxi.) 31); καινοὶ οὐρανοί, καινὴ γῆ, 2 Pet. iii. 13; Rev. xxi. 1, (Is. xv. 17 ; xvi. 22) ; Ἱερουσαλήμ (see Ἱεροσόλυμα, fin.), Rey. iii. 12; xxi. 2; ἄνθρωπος (see the word, 1 f.), Eph. ii. 15; iv. 24, (καρδία, πνεῦμα, Ezek. xviii. 31; xxxvi. 26) ; καινὰ πάντα ποιῶ. I bring all…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καινός (kainos) — new.

καινός, ή, όν,

new, fresh, ἔργα οὔτ᾽ ὦν κ. οὔτε παλαιά [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κ. λόγους φέρειν to bring news, [Refs]; τίδ᾽ ἐστὶ κ.; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἢ βούλεσθε περιιόντες πυνθάνεσθαι, “λέγεταί τι κ.;” [Refs 4th c.BC+] anew, afresh, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc. (also ἐκ καινοῦ [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; especially of new dramas, τραγῳδῶν γιγνομένων καινῶν [Refs 4th c.BC+]; briefly τραγῳδοῖς κ. at the representation of the new tragedies, Docum. cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but κ. κωμῳδία, τραγῳδία, of a new style of drama, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. newly-made, κύλικες, τριήρης, ὀθόνια, οἶνος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

3. adverb -νῶς newly, afresh, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καινός

kainos

of uncertain affinity; new (especially in freshness; while 3501 is

properly so with respect to age:--new.

see GREEK for 3501

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καινός, ή, όν

Adj

fresh, new

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καινός kainos 41x

new, recently made, Mt. 9:17; Mk. 2:22; new in species, character, or mode, Mt. 26:28, 29; Mk. 14:24, 25; Lk. 22:20; Jn. 13:34; 2 Cor. 5:17; Gal. 6:15; Eph. 2:15; 4:24; 1 Jn. 2:7; Rev. 3:12; novel, strange, Mk. 1:27; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καινός καινός, new, fresh, Lat. recens, novus, καινὰ καὶ παλαιὰ ἔργα Hdt.; καινοὺς λόγους φέρειν to bring news, Aesch.; λέγεταί τι καινόν; Dem.; ἐκ καινῆς (sc. ἀρχῆς) anew, afresh, Lat. de novo, Thuc.:—esp. of dramas produced for the first time, Aeschin., Dem.

newly-invented, new-fangled, novel, Eur., etc.; κ. θεοί strange gods, Plat.; καινά innovations, Xen.; οὐδὲν καινότερον εἰσέφερε τῶν ἄλλων he introduced as little of anything new as others, id. Xen.; τὸ καινὸν τοῦ πολέμου the unforeseen turn which war often takes, Thuc.

κ. ἄνθρωπος = novus homo, Plut.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
86%new
new86% · 38×a new7% · 3×anew5% · 2×fresh2% · 1×

44 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object45%adverbial21%subject17%predicate12%second object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 42 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ποτήριονa drinking cupἐγώἐν
ἀσκόςa wine-skin
εἰς
ἐντολήan ordinance, injunc
οὐNegπάλινagain, further,
σύ
μετάγράφωI write
διαθήκηa covenant, will, te
ἸούδαςJudah, Judas, Juοὗτος
καινόςnew42×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀμφότεροιboth of twoπαλαιόςold, ancient, woγῆthe earth, soil,
ἐν
Article theὅς
διαθήκηa covenant, will, te
ἐνεἰμίI am, existοὐNeg
γράφωI write
σύὅς
κατά
ἐξουσίαpower, authorityArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαινός · 42× in the New Testament
Revelation Luke Mark Matthew 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 John 2 Peter Acts Ephesians John 1 Corinthians
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 28 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn Husbandry 148c. AD 40

„τίς ὁ ἄνθρωπος ὁ οἰκοδομήσας οἰκίαν καινὴν καὶ οὐκ ἐνεκαίνισεν αὐτήν;

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.79c. AD 75–95

Λαμέχου γάρ ἐστιν υἱός, οὗ πατὴρ ἦν Μαθουσάλας, οὗτος δὲ ἦν τοῦ Ἀνώχου τοῦ Ἰαρέδου, Μαλαήλου δὲ Ἰάρεδος ἐγεγόνει, ὃς ἐκ Καϊνᾶ τεκνοῦται τοῦ Ἀνώσου σὺν ἀδελφαῖς πλείοσιν, Ἄνωσος δὲ Σήθου υἱὸς ἦν τοῦ Ἀδάμου·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
P.Fay. 121Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 110

Σαβῖνος Γεμείνωι τῶι ἰδίωι χαίρειν. εὖ ποιήσεις δοὺς Οὐηστείνωι εἰς τὸν ζυγὸν αὐτοῦ ζυγόδεσμον καινὸν στερεόν, ὃ καὶ ἀλείψεις ἐπιμελῶς, ἐκ τῶν ἐν τῆι κιβωτῶι τῶν ἀσκῶν ἧι ἔχεις

P.Aberd. 42 hKaranis (Arsinoites)AD 189

τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Καινῆς ἐρημοφυλακίας Χήρης ἐξάγων ὄνον ἕνα . ἔτους κθ Ἐπεὶφ κα.

P.Bodl. 1 15ArsinoitesAD 176–AD 225

μόνας, γίνονται κριθῆς ἀρτάβαι τμ, ἐξ ὧν ὑπελογήθησαν ὑπὲρ ἑκατοστῆς α 𐅵 διαφόρου μέτρου καινοῦ παρὰ τὸ παλαιὸν κριθῆς ἀρτάβαι πέντε , λοιπὰς καθαρᾶς ἀδόλου ἀβώλου κεκοσκινευμένης κριθῆς ἀρτάβας

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
γράφωgraphō I am writing G1125 Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · singular
192× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This verb means to write or record something, like in John 8:6 where Jesus writes on the ground. It can also mean to describe or express something in writing, as seen in Luke 1:63 and Galatians 6:11.
Tyndale gloss
to write
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

γράφω (graphō) primarily means 'to write' and is derived from a sense of scratching or engraving. It encompasses various forms of writing, including inscribing letters, recording information, and expressing content in written form. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as recording scripture (e.g., Matthew 4:4) and writing letters (e.g., Acts 23:25). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

γράφω, [in LXX chiefly for כּתב ];

to scrape, graze (Hom.), and later (Hdt.) to sketch, draw.

to write;

of forming or tracing letters on writing material: Jo 8:[6], Ga 6:11, II Th 3:17;

to express in writing, commit to writing, record: Lk 1:63, Jo 19:21, 22 Re 1:11, 19 al.; of scripture as a standing authority (Deiss., BS, 112ff.), γέγραπται, it stands written (Luther), Mt 4:4, Mk 7:6, Lk 4:8, Ro 1:17, I Co…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

γράφω ; [impf. ἔγραφον]; fut. γράψω; 1 aor. ἔγραψα; pf. γέγραφα; Pass., [pres. γράφομαι]; pf. γέγραμμαι ; [plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγέγραπτο, Rev. xvii. 8 Lchm.]; 2 aor. ἐγράφην ; (prop. to grave, scrape, scratch, engrave ; ef. Germ. graben, eingraben ; γράψεν δὲ οἱ ὀστέον ἄχρις αἰχμή, Hom. Il. 17, 599; σήματα γράψας ἐν πίνακι, ib. 6, 169; hence to draw letters), towrite; 1. with reference to the form of the letters; to delineate (or form) letters on a tablet, parchment, paper, or other material: τῷ 8aκτύλῳ ἔγραφεν eis τὴν γῆν made figures on the ground, Jn. viii. 6 Rec. ; οὕτω γράφω so am I accustomed to form my letters, 2 Thess. iii. 17; πηλίκοις γράμμασι ἔγραψα with how large (and so, ill-formed [?]) letters I have written, Gal. vi. 11; ef. Winer, Riickert, Hilgenfeld ad loe. [for the views of those who regard éyp. as covering the close of the Ep. only, see Bp. Lghtft. and Mey.; cf. W.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

γράφω. Deissmann (BS, pp. 112 ff. 249 f.) has shown the widespread juristic_use in the papyri of the ‘* biblical” γέγραπται with reference to the regulative and authoritative character

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

γράφω (graphō) — to write.

γράφω [ᾰ],

future -ψω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἔγραψα, Epic dialect γράψα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect γέγραφα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, future γράψομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐγραψάμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, future γρᾰφήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.: aorist ἐγράφην [ᾰ], [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect γέγραμμαι (also in middle sense, see near the end), 3rd.pers. singular ἔγραπται [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; participle ἐγραμμένος or ἠγρ- [Refs 1st c.AD+]: 3rd.pers. plural γεγράφαται [Refs], Doric dialect γεγράβανται [Refs]: pluperfect ἐγέγραπτο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: 3rd.pers. plural ἐγεγράφατο [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in aorist active:—scratch, graze, αἰχμὴ γράψεν οἱ ὀστέον ἄχρις [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γράψας ἐν πίνακι πτυκτῷ θυμοφθόρα πολλά having marked or drawn signs thereon, [Refs]represent by lines, draw, paint, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γῆς περιόδους γ. draw maps, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

γράφω

grapho

a primary verb; to "grave", especially to write; figuratively, to

describe:--describe, write(-ing, -ten).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

γράφω

v.

I write

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

γράφω graphō 191x

to engrave, write, according to the ancient method of writing on plates of metal, waxes tables, etc., Jn. 8:6, 8; to write on parchment, paper, etc., generally, Mt. 27:37, et al.; to write letters to another, Acts 23:25; 2 Cor. 2:9; 13:10, et al.; to describe in writing, Jn. 1:46; Rom. 10:5; to inscribe in a catalogue, etc., Lk. 10:20; Rev. 13:8; 17:8, et al.; to write a law, command, or enact in writing, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

γράφω Orig. sense, to scratch, scrape, graze, αἰχμὴ γράψεν ὀστέον Il.; σήματα γράψας ἐν πίνακι having scratched marks as tokens on a tablet, id. Il.:—then, to represent by lines drawn, to delineate, draw, paint, Hdt., Aesch.; εἰκὼν γεγραμμένη Ar.: also in Mid., ζῷα γράφεσθαι ῀ ζωγραφεῖν, Hdt.

to express by written characters, to write, τι id. Hdt.; γο. τινά to write a person's name, Xen.; γ. ἐπιστολήν, etc., id. Xen.; γρ. τι εἰς διφθέρας Hdt.

to inscribe, like ἐπιγράφω, γρ. εἰς στήλην Eur., Dem.

to write down, γρ. τινὰ αἴτιον to set him down as the cause, Hdt.

to register, enrol, γρ. τινὰ τῶν ἱππευόντων among the cavalry, Xen.; Κρέοντος προστάτου γεγράψομαι, as a dependent of Creon…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-1S — Verb · present · active · indicative · first person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

rit'-ing:

I. GENERAL

1. Definition

2. Inward Writing

3. Outward Writing

II. THE SYMBOLS

1. Object Writing

2. Image Writing

3. Picture Writing

4. Mnemonic Writing

5. Phonetic Writing

III. METHODS

IV. INSTRUMENTS

V. MATERIALS

1. Clay

2. Stone

3. Lead

4. Bronze

5. Gold and Silver

6. Wood

7. Bones and Skins

8. Vellum

9. Papyrus

10. Paper

11. Ink

VI. FORMS

1. The Roll

2. The Codex

VII. WRITING

1. Writers

2. The Writing Art

VIII. HISTORY OF BIBLICAL HANDWRITING

1. Mythological Origins

2. Earliest Use

3. Biblical History

LITERATURE

I. General.

1. Definition:

Writing is the art of recording thought, and recording is the making of permanent symbols. Concept, expression and record are three states of the same work or word. Earliest mankind expressed itself by gesture or voice and recorded in memory, but at a very early stage man began to feel the need of objective aids to memory and the need of transmitting a message to a distance or…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Writing

The art of writing must have been known in the time of the early Pharaohs. Moses is commanded “to write for a memorial in a book” (Ex. 17:14) a record of the attack of Amalek. Frequent mention is afterwards made of writing (28:11, 21, 29, 36; 31:18; 32:15, 16; 34:1, 28; 39:6, 14, 30). The origin of this art is unknown, but there is reason to conclude that in the age of Moses it was well known. The inspired books of Moses are the most ancient extant writings, although there are written monuments as old as about B.C. 2000. The words expressive of “writing,” “book,” and “ink,” are common to all the branches or dialects of the Semitic language, and hence it has been concluded that this art must have been known to the earliest Semites before they separated into their various tribes, and nations, and families.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

There is no account in the Bible of the origin of writing. That the Egyptians in the time of Joseph were acquainted with writing of a certain kind there is evidence to prove, but there is nothing to show that up to this period the knowledge extended to the Hebrew family. At the same time there is no evidence against it. Writing is first distinctly mentioned in (Exodus 17:14) and the connection clearly implies that it was not then employed for the first time but was so familiar as to be used for historic records. It is not absolutely necessary to infer from this that the art of writing was an accomplishment possessed by every Hebrew citizen. If we examine the instances in which writing is mentioned in connection with individuals, we shall find that in all cases the writers were men of superior position. In (Isaiah 29:11,12) there is…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

See BOOK.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
30%it has been written
it has been written30% · 61×written19% · 38×do write7% · 15×write6% · 13×it was written6% · 13×i have written5% · 10×i am writing5% · 10×wrote3% · 6×other renderings19% · 39×

205 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 31 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 192 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καθώςjust as, as
ἀλλάbut, exceptὑπάγωI go away, deparθέλωI will, wish, de
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, εἰμίI am, existοὗτος
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakαἰτίαa cause, reason,ἐπί
σύ
ἔχωI have, hold, poσκληροκαρδίαhardness of hearκαθεξῆςin order, just a
εἰμίI am, exist
καθώςjust as, asοὐNegοὗwhere, whither,
γράφωI am writing192×
what comes after →
σύ
ἀλλάbut, exceptὅτιthat, since, becἵναin order that, s
Article the
ἐμόςὄνομαname, character,οἶκοςa house, househo
γάρfor
ὅτιthat, since, becκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατάσσωI strike
ἐν
Article theβίβλοςa written book, νόμοςa law, the Mosai
ὅτιthat, since, because
οὗτοςArticle theοὐNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceγράφω · 192× in the New Testament
Revelation John Romans Luke 1 Corinthians 1 John Acts 2 Corinthians Matthew Mark Galatians 3 John

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament22 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 111 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 141c. AD 40

ἀποδεῖ γὰρ τὰ μιμήματα τῶν ἀρχετύπων, τὰ δ’ ἀπὸ τῶν μιμημάτων γραφόμενα καὶ πλαττόμενα πολὺ μᾶλλον, ἅτε μακρὰν ἀφεστῶτα τῆς ἀρχῆς·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.4c. AD 75–95

τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.3c. AD 100

τὸ τέλειον σκάνδαλον ἤγγικεν, περὶ οὖ γέγραπται, ὡς Ἐνὼχ λέγει.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Adl. 10Pathyris102 BC

εἰκάδος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἀποτεισάτω καθὰ γέγραπται παραχρῆμα ἐπάναγκον· ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἔστω Ἀγαθίνωι καὶ Πατῆτι ἐκ τοῦ δεδανεισμένου Πανᾶτος καὶ

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

καὶ παρείληφεν· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιῇ καθὰ γέγραπται ἀποτεισάτω ἐν τῷ ἐχομένωι μηνὶ παραχρῆμα ἡμιόλιον ἢ τὴν ἐσομένην ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾶι τιμήν,

P.Adl. 19Pathyris99 BC

ιϛ ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιήσηι καθὰ γέγραπται ἀποτεισάτω ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ παραχρῆμα τὰ τοῦ σιδήρου μνᾶς δισχιλίας χμ καὶ ἐπίτιμον

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ὑμῖνsu to you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · dative · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2DP — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · plural
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2DP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύto you2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
hos, hē which G3739 Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · neuter
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-NSN — Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-NSN Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwhich1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ἐστινeimi is G1510 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%is
is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς
οὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
εἰμίis2457×
what comes after →
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegγάρfor
ἐν
Article theσύαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐγώ
εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ἀληθὲςalēthēs true G227 Adjective · nominative · singular · neuter
26× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means true or real, like something that is not hidden. It is used in John, Acts, and other letters to describe things that are genuine and trustworthy.
Amplified meaning
genuine, authentic
Tyndale gloss
true
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀληθής (transliterated as alēthēs) means 'true' or 'unconcealed.' It describes things that conform to reality and can refer to truthful persons. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as in John 4:18 and 2 Peter 2:22. Lexicons note a distinction between ἀληθής and ἀληθινός, with the former emphasizing factual truth and the latter relating to genuine existence.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ἀληθής, ἀληθινός from a scan

Tue Latin ‘verax’ and ‘verus’ would severally represent ἀληθής and ἀληθινός, and in the main reproduce the distinctions existing between them; indeed, the Vulgate does commonly by aid of these indicate whether of the two stands in the original; but we having lost, or nearly lost, ‘ very ᾿ (vrai) as an adjective, retaining it only as an adverb, have ‘true’ alone whereby to render them both. It follows that the difference between the two disappears in our Version: and this by no fault of our Translators—unless, indeed, they erred in not recovering ‘very,’ which was Wiclif’s common translation of ‘verus’ (thus John xv. 1, “I am the verrz vine ’’), and which to recover would have been easy in their time (indeed they actually so use it at Gen. xxvii. 21, 24); as it would not be impossible in ours. We in fact do retain it in the Nicene Creed, where it does excellent service— very God of very…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀληθής, -ές

(< λήθω = λανθάνω, hence primarily, unconcealed, manifest; hence, actual, real),

[in LXX for אֶמֶת, etc.;]

of things, true, conforming to reality: Jo 4:18 5:31,32 6:55 (= ἀληθινός, q.v.) Jo 8:13,14, 17 10:41 19:35 21:24, Ac 12:9, Phl 4:8, Tit 1:13, I Pe 5:12, II Pe 2:22, I Jo 2:8, III Jo 12;

of persons, truthful: Mt 22:16, Mk 12:14, Jo 3:33 7:18 8:26, Ro 3:4, II Co 6:8.†

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀληθής, -€s, (a priv. and λήθω, λαθεῖν [AavOavw), τὸ λῆθος, --- cf. ἀμαθής ; lit. not hidden, unconcealed), [fr. Hom. down]; 1 true: Jn. ivy. 18; x. 415 xix. 35; 1 Jn. ii. 8, 27; Acts xii. 9 (an actual occurrence, opp. to ὅραμα); Phil. iv. 8; μαρτυρία, Jn. v. 31 sq.; Vill. 13 sq. 17; xxi. 24; 3 Jn. 12; Tit. 1. 13; κρίσις, just, Jn. viii. 16 (L T Tr WH ἀληθινή) ; παροιμία, 2 Pet. ii. 22; χάρις, grace which can be trusted, 1 Pet. v. 12. 2. loving the truth, speaking the truth, truthful: Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. vii. 18; 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to πλάνος); of God, Jn. iii. 33; viii. 26; Ro. iii. 4 (opp. to ψεύστης). 3. i. 4. ἀληθινός, 1: In. vi. 55 (LT Tr ὝΨΗ; for Rec. ἀληθῶς), as in Sap. xii. 27, where ἀληθὴς θεός is contrasted with obs ἐδόκουν θεούς. Cf. Riickert, Abendmahl, p. 266 sq. [On the distinction betw. this word and the next, see Trench § viii. ; Schmidt ch. 178…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀληθής. The adjective is common in formule: thus in the 42 documents (Ptolemaic) of the P Magd there are 17 instances, all like 178 kal ἐὰν ἧι ἃ γράφω ἀληθῆ, or to the same purport. So P Strass I. 4118 (c. A.D. 250) Set yap τὰ ἀληθῆ λέγειν, etc. It seems always to bear the normal meaning of “true in fact”; so ὅρκος, Wilcken Os¢v 1150 (Ptol.). In P Tebt II. 285% (A.D. 239) it is applied to ‘‘ legitimate” children: cf. 26. 29317 (c. a.D. 187), where, with reference to an application to circumcise a boy, it is declared ἀληθῆ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἱερατικοῦ [yé]vous, ‘that heis in truth of priestly family.” In BGU IV. 1024%-17 (iv/v A.D.) οὐκ ἀληθής is applied to a person. For the adverb we need cite only P Gen I. 555 (iii/A-D.) καλοκαγαθίαν ὡς ἀληθὸς ἀσύνκριτον…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀληθής (alēthēs) — true.

ἀληθ-ής [ᾰ],

Doric dialect ἀλᾱθής, ές, (λήθω, ={λανθάνω}: ἀληθὲς τὸ μὴ λήθῃ ὑποπῖπτον[Refs]:—unconcealed, so true, real, opposed to false, apparent:

I. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀληθέϊ λόγῳ χρᾶσθαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.2. of persons, etc., truthful, honest (not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἶνος ἀ. `in vino veritas', [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.3. of oracles, true, unerring, ἀλαθέα μαντίων θῶκον[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of dreams, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. of qualities or events, true, real, φίλος[Refs 5th c.BC+]; genuine, ἀ. εἶναι δεῖ τὸ σεμνόν, οὐ κενόν[Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. realizing itself, coming to fulfilment, ἀρά[Refs 4th c.BC+]

III. adverb ἀληθῶς, Ionic dialect -θέως, truly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀληθής

alethes

from 1 (as a negative particle) and 2990; true (as not

concealing):--true, truly, truth.

see GREEK for 1

see GREEK for 2990

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀληθής, ές

Adj

unconcealed, true

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀληθής alēthēs 26x

true, Jn. 4:18; worthy of credit, Jn. 5:31; truthful, Jn. 7:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀληθής α privat. , λήθω ῀ λανθάνω unconcealed, true:

true, opp. to ψευδής, Hom.; τὸ ἀληθές, by crasis τἀληθές, ionic τὠληθές, and τὰ ἀληθῆ, by crasis τἀληθῆ the truth, Hdt., attic

of persons, truthful, Il., attic

of oracles and the like, true, coming true, Aesch., etc.

adv. ἀληθῶς, ionic -θέως, truly, Hdt., etc.

really, actually, in reality, Aesch., Thuc., etc.; so, ὡς ἀληθῶς Eur., Plat., etc.

neut. as adv., proparox. ἄληθες; itane? indeed? really? in sooth? ironically, Soph., Eur., etc.

τὸ ἀληθές really and truly, Lat. revera, Plat., etc.; so, τὸ ἀληθέστατον in very truth, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSN — Adjective · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
88%true
true88% · 23×real4% · 1×truly4% · 1×truth4% · 1×

26 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate89%second object4%adverbial4%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 26 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὅτιthat, since, because
οἶδαI know, remember
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegοὗτοςὅσος
ἐγώ
σάρξflesh, bodyαἷμαbloodπέμπωI send
οὗτος
ἀνήρa male human beiαὐτόςπερί
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
ἀληθήςtrue26×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
καίand, even, also,Article theβρῶσιςeating, food, a
εἶπονI say, speak
λέγωI say, speak
ἵναin order that, s
αὐτός
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
δέbut, on the othe

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀληθής · 26× in the New Testament
John 1 John 1 Peter 2 Corinthians 2 Peter 3 John Acts Matthew Mark Philippians Romans Titus
Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 78c. AD 40

ἐν αἷς ἁπάσαις τὴν ἀρχέτυπον καὶ ἀληθῆ καὶ παραδειγματικὴν μουσικὴν οὐκ ἂν ἁμαρτάνοι τις εἶναι λέγων, ἀφ’ ἧς οἱ μετὰ ταῦτα ἄνθρωποι γραψάμενοι ἐν ταῖς ἑαυτῶν ψυχαῖς τὰς εἰκόνας ἀναγκαιοτάτην καὶ ὠφελιμωτάτην τέχνην τῷ βίῳ παρέδοσαν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.166c. AD 75–95

Τῶν γὰρ Αἰγυπτίων διαφόροις ἀρεσκομένων ἔθεσι καὶ τὰ παρʼ ἀλλήλοις ἐκφαυλιζόντων νόμιμα καὶ διὰ τοῦτο δυσμενῶς ἐχόντων πρὸς ἀλλήλους, συμβαλὼν αὐτῶν ἑκάστοις καὶ διαπτύων τοὺς λόγους οὓς ἐποιοῦντο περὶ τῶν ἰδίων κενοὺς καὶ μηδὲν ἔχοντας ἀληθὲς…

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 45.2c. AD 96

ἐγκεκύφατε εἰς τὰς ἱερὰς γραφάς, τὰς ἀληθεῖς, τὰς διὰ τοῦ πνεύματος τοῦ ἁγίου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 38Pathyrites171 BC

συντάξαι γράψαι Κλεάρχωι τῶι ἐπιστάτη ἐξαποστεῖλαι αὐτὸν ἐπὶ σέ, ἵνʼ ἐὰν ἦι ἃ γράφω ἀληθῆ, τύχω τοῦ δικαίου καθὼς ἂν διαλάβης. εὐτύχει.

P.Berl.Leihg. 1 10ArsinoitesAD 120

διʼ αὐτῆς σημαινομένης καταγραφῆς ἐπενηνεγμένης καὶ τοῦ ἐντετευχότος ὀμωμοκότος Αὐτοκράτορα Καίσαρα Τραιανὸν Ἁδριανὸν Σεβαστὸν ἀληθῆ εἶναι τὰ διὰ τῆς ἐντεύξεως δεδηλωμένα καὶ μηδὲν ὑπεναντίον ᾠκονομῆσθαι, συνεκρίναμεν γραφῆναι…

ÉdP 5 (1939), p. 99-Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 314

καὶ ὄμνυμεν τὸν Σεβάσμιον ὅρκον τῶν δεσποτῶν ἡμῶν Κωνσταντίνου καὶ Λικιννίου τῶν ἀνικήτων αὐτοκρατόρων ἀληθῆ εἶναι τὰ ἐνγεγραμμένα καὶ μηδὲν διεψεῦσθαι ἢ ἔνοχοι εἴημεν τῷ θείῳ ὅρκῳ. ἔστι δέ·

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ἐνen in G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
αὐτῷautos Him G846 Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Amplified meaning
Jesus Christ, the Son of God
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DSM — Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςHim5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ἐνen in G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ὑμῖν,su you, G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · dative · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Amplified meaning
as believers, followers of Christ
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2DP — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · plural
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2DP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύyou,2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ὅτιhoti because G3754 Conjunction
1,293× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'that' or 'because', used to introduce a reason or explanation. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 3:9 and Romans 8:38. It helps to show cause and effect in sentences.
Tyndale gloss
that/since: that
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅτι (hoti) is a conjunction primarily meaning 'that' or 'because.' It introduces objective clauses, often following verbs of perception or declaration, and can also serve as a causal particle. The New Testament frequently employs it in this way, such as in Matthew 5:4-12. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its pleonastic function in direct discourse.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅτι,

conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις).

As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that;

after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mt 3:9 6:32 11:25, Mk 3:28, Lk 2:49, Jo 2:22, Ac 4:13, Ro 1:13 8:38 10:9, Phl 4:15, Ja 2:24, al.; elliptically, Jo 6:46, Phl 3:12, al.

After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or pers. pron., Jo 3:19 16:19, Ro 9:6, I Jo 3:16 al.; c. pron. interrog., Mt 8:27, Mk 4:41,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 87), marking I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προεἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες [ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οτι. (1) For ὅτι, ‘‘that,” introducing an objective clause after verbs of knowing, saying, etc., cf. P Tebt II. 4098 (A.D. 5) εἰδὼ[ς ὅ]τι ἐξίι)ουσίαν αὐτῶν ἔχει kal Λυσίμαχος kal σύ, ΚΕ knew that both you and Lysimachus had plenty of them” (Edd.), P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) νομίσας ὅτι (cf. Mt 517) κιχρᾷς por αὐτούς, ““ consider that you are lending them (sc. staters) to me’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 8464* (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93) γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω, ὅτι οὐχ [HA] Lov, ὅτι ἀναβένις (1. ἀναβαίνεις) els τὴν μητρόπολιν, “1 wish you to know that I had no hope that you were coming up to the metropolis,” 74.9 αἴγραψά σοι, ὅτι γυμνός εἰμει, “1 wrote you that I am naked,” and P Tebt II. 420+ (iii/A.D.) οἴδατε ὅτι ἀπὸ ζημίας ἠμί, ‘‘ You know that I am blameless.” Ὅτι, however, is frequently omitted, e.g. BGU IIL. 8153(ii/a.p.) γεινόσκιν σε θέλω [τὴ]ν ἐπιστολήν σου ἔλαβε (corrected by another hand…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅτι (hoti) — that/since: that.

ὅτῐ,

Epic dialect ὅττῐ (both in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: conjunction, to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Usage:

I. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact:

I. a in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always with indicative, the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ᾽ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. b in Attic dialect, ὅτι takes indicative after primary tenses, indicative or optative after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός [Refs 5th c.BC+] news came that Megara had (literal has) revolted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes optative and indicative are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη [Refs 5th c.BC+].. and the accusative with infinitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅτι

hoti

neuter of 3748 as conjunction; demonstrative, that (sometimes

redundant); causative, because:--as concerning that, as though,

because (that), for (that), how (that), (in) that, though, why.

see GREEK for 3748

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅτι

Cj.

that, since, because

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅτι hoti 1x

originally was the neuter of ὅστις, that, Mt. 2:16, 22, 23; 6:5, 16; often used pleonastically in reciting another’s words, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 19:42; Acts 5:23; as a causal particle, for that, for, because, Mt. 2:18; 5:3, 4, 5; 13:13; because, seeing that, since, Lk. 23:40; Acts 1:17

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

be-kos' (hina, "in order that"): "The multitude rebuked them, because (AV; the Revised Version (British and American) "that") they should hold their peace" (Mt 20:31).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%that
that64% · 856×because19% · 252×for16% · 209×other renderings1% · 12×

1,329 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,293 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγάρforδέbut, on the othe
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςσύδέbut, on the othe
οἶδαI know, remember
οὐNegκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakμαθητήςa learner, disciπερί
γινώσκωI come to know, lear
οὗτοςκαίand, even, also,αὐτός
ὅτιbecause1293×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existοἶδαI know, rememberδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existοὐNegArticle the
οὗτος
εἰμίI am, existArticle theποιέωI do, make
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theῥῆμαa thing spokenζητέωI seek, search f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅτι · 1,293× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 John Revelation 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Galatians Philippians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 8c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοσοφίας ἐπ’ αὐτὴν φθάσας ἀκρότητα καὶ χρησμοῖς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ συνεκτικώτατα τῶν τῆς φύσεως ἀναδιδαχθεὶς ἔγνω δή, ὅτι ἀναγκαιότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τοῖς οὖσι τὸ μὲν εἶναι δραστήριον αἴτιον, τὸ δὲ παθητόν, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν δραστήριον ὁ τῶν ὅλων…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
C.Erbstreit14Diospolis Magna (Theben)187 BC

καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τοῦ ἐγκυκλίου καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ καθήκοντα. … ται Προῖτος, καθʼ ὅτι πρόκειται … ἑξήκοντα ἓξ τετρωβόλου καὶ τῆς … … τοπογραμματέως τοῦ Παθυρίτου … ἀρουρῶν

P.Grenf. 1 10 p. 24Hermonthis149 BC

ι τοῖς ἐνκαλουμένοις τὸ ἀντίγραφον τῆς ἐντεύξεως λαβεῖν παρ … τ … … πίστιν ὅτι ἀπαντησα … ἐπὶ τὸ ἐν τῆι αὐλῆι κριτήριον ἐν ἡμέραις λ οὐκ ο

P.Bour. 10Pathyris89 BC

δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
σκοτίαskotia darkness G4653 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
17× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Darkness refers to a lack of light or understanding. In John 1:5, it says that Jesus is the light that shines in the darkness. It can also mean a time of secrecy or a state of spiritual blindness.
Amplified meaning
lack of spiritual understanding, ignorance
Tyndale gloss
darkness
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word σκοτία (skotia) means darkness or gloom, both literally and metaphorically. It can refer to physical darkness, secrecy, or spiritual ignorance and moral darkness, as seen in various New Testament passages. The term is derived from σκότος and is used to describe both a lack of light and a state of spiritual blindness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

† σκοτία, -ας, ἡ

[in LXX: Jb 28:3 (אֹפֶל), Mi 3:6 (חָשְׁכָה), Is 16:3 * ;]

in late writers = σκότος,

darkness: Jo 6:17 20:1. Metaph.,

of secrecy (opp. to ἐν τ. φωτί): Mt 10:27, Lk 12:3;

of spiritual darkness: Mt 4:16, Jo 1:5 8:12 12:35, 46, I Jo 1:5 2:8, 9, 11.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σκοτία, -as, 7, [on its deriv. ef. σκηνή], (Thom. Mag. σκύτος κ. τὸ σκύτος" TO δὲ σκοτία οὐκ ἐν χρήσει sc. in Attic {cf. Moeris 8. v.; L. and S.s. v. σκύτος, fin.]), darkness: prop. the darkness due to want of daylight, Jn. vi. 17; xx. 13 ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ (λαλεῖν τι), unseen, in secret, (i. q. ἐν κρυπτῷ. Jn. xviii. 20), privily, in private, opp. to ἐν τῷ φωτί, Mt. x. 27; Lk. xii. 3; metaph. used of ignorance of divine things, and its associated wickedness, and the resultant misery: Mt. iv. 16 LTrWH; Jn. i. 5; viii. 12; xii. 35, 46; 1 Jn. i. δ: ii, 8 sq. 11. (Ap. Rh 4, 1698; Anth. 8, 187. 190; for πε τα Mic. iii. 6; for de& Job xxviii. 3.)

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σκοτία (skotia) — darkness.

σκοτί-α, ἡ,

(σκότος) darkness, gloom, [NT+3rd c.BC+]

II. in Architecture, scotia, cavetto, a sunken moulding, so called from the dark shadow it casts, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

III. Σκοτιά, epithet of Aphrodite in Egypt, [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σκοτία

skotia

from 4655; dimness, obscurity (literally or

figuratively):--dark(-ness).

see GREEK for 4655

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σκοτία, ας, ἡ

n.f.

darkness

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σκοτία skotia 16x

darkness, Jn. 6:17; 20:1; privacy, Mt. 10:27; Lk. 12:3; met. moral or spiritual darkness, Jn. 1:5 (2x); 8:12; 12:35, 46; 1 Jn. 1:5; 2:8, 9, 11*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σκοτία σκοτία, ἡ, σκότος darkness, gloom, Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Darkness

The plague (the ninth) of darkness in Egypt (Ex. 10:21) is described as darkness “which may be felt.” It covered “all the land of Egypt,” so that “they saw not one another.” It did not extend to the land of Goshen (ver. 23).

When Jesus hung upon the cross (Matt. 27:45; Luke 23:44), from the “sixth hour there was darkness over all the land unto the ninth hour.”

On Mount Sinai, Moses (Ex. 20:21) “drew near unto the thick darkness where God was.” This was the “thick cloud upon the mount” in which Jehovah was when he spake unto Moses there. The Lord dwelt in the cloud upon the mercy-seat (1 Kings…

is spoken of as encompassing the actual presence of God, as that out of which he speaks, --the envelope, as it were, of divine glory. (Exodus 20:21; 1 Kings 8:12) The plague of darkness in Egypt was miraculous. The darkness "over all the land," (Matthew 27:45) attending the crucifixion has been attributed to an eclipse, but was undoubtedly miraculous, as no eclipse of the sun could have taken place at that time, the moon being at the full at the time of the passover. Darkness is also, as in the expression "land of darkness," used for the state of the dead, (Job 10:21,22) and frequently, figuratively, for ignorance and unbelief, as the privation of spiritual light. (

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The absence of natural light, Ge 1:2, and hence figuratively a state of misery and adversity, Job 18:6 Ps 107:10 Isa 8:22 9:1; also the absence of the sun and stars, and hence the fall of chief men and national convulsions, Isa 13:10 Ac 2:20. "Works of darkness," are the impure mysteries practiced in heathen worship, Eph 5:11. "Outer darkness" illustrates the gloom of those on whom the gates of heaven are closed, Mt 8:12. The darkness in Egypt,

→ Over the face of the earth Ge 1:2; Job 38:9; Jer 4:23

→ Called NIGHT Ge 1:5

→ God creates Isa 45:7

→ Miraculous

In Egypt Ex 10:21,22; Ps 105:28

At Mount Sinai Ex 20:21; Heb 12:18

At the crucifixion Mt 27:45; Mr 15:33

→ FIGURATIVE

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
88%darkness
darkness88% · 14×dark6% · 1×when dark6% · 1×

16 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial47%subject35%predicate18%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 17 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
ΚαφαρναούμPropεἰμίI am, exist
ἐν
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
μήNeg
ἵναin order that, s
πρωΐearly in the morning
ἔρχομαιI come, go
σκοτίαdarkness17×
what comes after →
λέγωI say, speak
ἐν
εἰμίI am, exist
ἕωςuntil, as far asκαίand, even, also,
φῶςlight, a source of l
ὁράωI see, look upon
φαίνωI shine, appear, see
καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
οὐNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσκοτία · 17× in the New Testament
John 1 John Matthew Luke
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
παράγεταιparagō is passing away G3855 Verb · present · middle · indicative · third person · singular
10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To pass by or go away from a place, as in Matthew 9:9 and Mark 1:16. This word means to lead near or go along. It is used to describe Jesus passing by and calling his disciples.
Amplified meaning
passing away, disappearing
Tyndale gloss
to pass
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

παράγω is built from the roots meaning 'beside' and 'to lead.' It covers a range of meanings including to lead past, depart, or pass away. In the New Testament, it is used in contexts such as passing by (Matthew 9:9, 27) and departing (John 8:59). Some lexicons note its use in a military context, while others emphasize its metaphorical applications.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

παρ-άγω,

[in LXX chiefly for עבר;]

trans., to lead by, lead aside, lead into, lead forward, etc.

Intrans.,

to pass by: Mt 9:9, 27 20:30, Mk 2:14 15:21, Jo 8:59 R, txt., 9:1; seq. παρό, c. acc., Mk 1:16;

to go away, depart; metaph., to pass away: I Co 7:31; mid., I Jo 2:8, 17.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

παρ-άγω ; impf. παρῆγον (Jn. viii. 59 Rec.) ; pres. pass. 3 pers. sing. παράγεται; fr. [Archil., Theogn.], Pind. and Hdt. down; Sept. several times for 72» in Kal and Hiphil ; 1. trans. [(cf. mapa, IV-)]; a. to lead past, lead by. b. to lead aside, mislead; to lead away. c. to lead to; to lead forth, bring forward. 2. intrans. (see ἄγω, 4) ; a. to pass by, go past: Mt. xx. 30; Mk. ii. 14; xv. 21; [Lk. xviii. 39 L mrg.]; foll. by παρά w. an ace. of place, Mk. i. 16 L T Tr WH (by κατά w. acc. of place, 3 Mace. vi. 16; θεωροῦντες παράγουσαν τὴν δύναμιν, Polyb. 5, 18, 4). b. to depart, go away: Jn. viii. 59 Rec.; ix. 1; ἐκεῖθεν, Mt. ix. 9, 27. ΓΑΙ. adhere to the meaning pass by in all these pass. ] Metaph. to pass away, disappear: 1 Co. vii. 31 (Ps. exliii. (exliv.) 5); in the passive in the same sense, 1 Jn. ii. Sele mapa-Seyparitw; 1 aor. inf. παραδειγματίσαι ; (παράδειγμα [(fr. δείκνυμι)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

παράγω (paragō) — to pass.

παρ-άγω,

future παράξω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect παραγέωχα [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—lead by or past a place, with accusative loci, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάραγε πτέρυγας fly past, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a person, ἐν θριάμβῳ παράγεσθαι [Refs 1st c.AD+]

2. in Tactics, march the men up from the side, bring them from column into line, π. τοὺς ἐπὶ κέρως πορευομένους.. εἰς μέτωπον [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. bring round or forward, ἀγκῶνα παρὰ τὸ στῆθος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; twist round or out of place, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

4. π. ὑπόχυμα couch a cataract, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

5. divert, ὑδραγωγόν [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

παράγω

parago

from 3844 and 71; to lead near, i.e. (reflexively or intransitively)

to go along or away:--depart, pass (away, by, forth).

see GREEK for 3844

see GREEK for 71

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

παράγω

v.

I pass by, depart, pass away

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

παράγω paragō 10x

to lead beside; intrans. to pass along or by, Mt. 20:30; Jn. 9:1; to pass on, Mt. 9:9, 27; intrans. and mid. to pass away, be in a state of transition, 1 Cor. 7:31; 1 Jn. 2:8, 17

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

παράγω fut. -άξω aor2 παρήγαγον to lead by or past a place, c. acc. loci, Hdt.

as military term, to march the men up from the side, to bring them from column into line, Xen.

to lead aside from the way, mislead, Lat. seducere, Pind., attic: —Pass., φόβῳ παρηγόμην Soph.; ἀπάτῃ Thuc.

generally, to lead to or into a thing, ἔς τι Eur.; mostly of something bad, Theogn., etc.:—Pass. to be induced, c. inf., παρηγμένος εἰργάσθαι τι Soph.

of things, to lead aside, alter the course of a thing, Hdt., Plat.

to bring and set beside others, to bring forward, introduce, ἐς μέσον Hdt.; π. εἰς τὸ δικαστήριον to bring a matter before the court, Dem.:—also to bring forward as a witness, id. Dem.

to bring in, with a notion of secresy, Hdt.:—Pass. to come in stealthily, slip in, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PMI-3S — Verb · present · middle · indicative · third person · singular
present middle indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PMI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
27%passing away
passing away27% · 3×passing on27% · 3×passing by27% · 3×passing9% · 1×he was passing by9% · 1×

11 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb70%adverbial20%object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἸησοῦςJesus
ὅτιthat, since, bec
ἀγγαρεύωI impress, send
καίand, even, also,
καταχράομαιI use up
μήNeg
σκοτίαdarkness
Article the
παράγωis passing away10×
what comes after →
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
ΛευίPropἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐκεῖθενthence, from that pl
Article the
κράζωI cry aloud, shriek
λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπαράγω · 10× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark 1 John 1 Corinthians John
Across the New Testament5 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.64c. AD 40

ἡ μὲν γὰρ σοφίζεται καὶ παράγει τὸν νοῦν, οὐχ ὁποῖα τὰ ὑποκείμενά ἐστι δηλοῦσα, ἀλλ’ ὁποῖα οὐκ ἔστιν, ἡ δὲ αἴσθησις ἀκραιφνῶς δίδωσι τὰ σώματα οὕτως, ὡς ἔχει φύσεως ἐκεῖνα, πλάσματος καὶ τέχνης ἐκτός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 16.304c. AD 75–95

οὗτος Ἀλέξανδρον παράγει νέον ὄντα καὶ περὶ ὧν ἐπεπόνθει μηδενὶ μὲν πρὸς ἐκεῖνον δὲ μόνον ἀδεῶς πεπεισμένον ἐξεῖναι λέγειν·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Tebt. 1 161Kerkeosiris (Arsinoites)117 BC–116 BC

εἰς δὲ Μοῖριν τὴν σύνεγγυς φρουρουμένην στάδια ρνθ, ὁ δʼ ἐξ αὐτῆς συναγόμενος σῖτος παράγεται εἰς τὸν ἐν τῇ κώμῃ βασιλικὸν θησαυρόν, μετρουμένων εἰς τὰς καθάρσεις καὶ τὸ κοσκινευτικὸν

P.Tebt. 1 92Kerkeosiris (Arsinoites)114 BC

ρξ εἰς δὲ Μοῖριν τὴνσύνενγυς φρουρουμένην στάδια ρνθ ὁ δʼ ἐξ αὐτῆς συναγόμενος σῖτος παράγεται εἰς τὸν ἐν τῇ κώμῃ βασιλικὸν θησαυρόν, προσμετρουμένων εἰς τὰς καθάρσεις καὶ τὸ κοσκινευτικὸν

Stud.Pal. 5 27Hermopolis (HermopolitesAD 253–AD 268

Column i … ει μέλλων παραγω… εν λέγω παρὰ γὰρ τῷ … συγχώρησόν μοι … η τοῦ Ἑριέως … γαρ

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
τὸho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
φῶςphōs light G5457 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
72× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Light refers to any kind of luminousness, natural or artificial, and is used in the Bible to describe the light of the sun or a lamp. In Matthew 17:2 and John 11:9-10, it describes Jesus shining like the sun.
Amplified meaning
spiritual illumination, enlightenment
Tyndale gloss
light
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φῶς (i.e., *phos*) means 'light' and can refer to both natural and artificial sources. It is used in various contexts, including physical light from the sun or lamps, as well as metaphorical light representing divine truth or spiritual illumination. The New Testament employs it to describe God's presence, the glory of Christ, and the moral clarity of believers. Notably, it appears in verses like Matthew 17:2 and 2 Corinthians 4:6.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — φῶς, φέγγος, φωστήρ, λύχνος, λαμπάς from a scan

Ati these words are rendered, some occasionally, some always, in our Version, by ‘light’; thus, dos at Matt. iv. 16; Rom. xiii. 12, and often; φέγγος at Matt. xxiv. 29; Mark xiii. 24; Luke xi. 33 (it does not occur again) ; φωστήρ at Phil. ii. 15 ; Rev. xxi. 11 (where only it occurs) ; λύχνος at Matt. vi. 22; John v. 35; 2 Pet.i. 19, and elsewhere; though this often by ‘ candle’ (Matt. v. 15; Rev. Xxli. 5); and λαμπὰς at Acts xx. 8, though elsewhere rendered ‘lamp’ (Matt. xxv. 1; Rev. vill. 10), and ‘ torch’ (John xviii. 3). The old grammarians distinguish between φῶς and φέγγος (which are but different forms of one and the same word), that φῶς is the light of the sun or of the day, φέγγος the light or lustre of the moon. The Attic writers, to whom this distinction must belong, if to any, themselves only imperfectly observe it. Thus, in Sophocles φέγγος is three or four times ascribed…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φῶς (Att.. contr. from φάος; < φάω), gen., φωτός, τό,

[in LXX chiefly for אוֹר ;]

light (opp. to τὸ σκότος, ἡ σκοτία): Mt 17:2, 5, Jo 11:9, 10, II Co 4:6; ἡλίου, Re 22:5; of a lamp, Lk 8:16 11:33, Jo 5:35, Re 18:23; of a supernatural heavenly light, Ac 9:3 12:7 22:6, 9, 11 26:13; hence, ἄγγελος φωτός, II Co 11:14; ὁ κλήρος τ. ἁγίων ἐν τ. φ., Col 1:12; of the divine glory, Re 21:24; by meton., of that which gives light: of fire, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φῶς, φωτός. τό, (contr. fr. φάος, fr. φάω to shine), fr. Hom. (who [as well as Pind.] uses the form φάος) down, Hebr. 18, light (opp. to τὸ σκότος, ἡ σκοτία) ; 1. prop. a. univ.: ὁ θεὸς ὁ εἰπὼν ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψαι, 3 Co. iv. 6 (Gen. i. 3); λευκὰ ὡς τὸ φῶς, Mt. xvii. 2; νεφέλη φωτός [Grsb. txt.] i. e. consisting of light, i. q. φωτεινή in RLT Tr WH, Mt. xvii. 5; τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου, of the sun, Jn. xi. 9; τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ, the light (i.e. illumining power) is not in him, consequently he does not see or distinguish the things about him, Jn. xi. 10; the light emitted bya lamp, Lk. viii. 16; [xi.33L Tr txt. WH]. a heavenly light, such as surrounds angels when they appear on earth: hence ἄγγελος φωτός, 2 Co. xi. 14, and illumines the place where they appear, Acts xii. 7; a light of this kind shone around Paul when he was converted to Christ, Acts xxii. 6, [9], 11[W. 371 (848)]; with…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

φῶς. For ‘‘light” opposed to “" darkness,” see P Leid Wi. 4 (ii/iii a.p.) (=I1. p. 101) φωτὸς καὶ σκότους. In the imprecatory curse Sy// 891 (= ὃ 1240)" the prayer is uttered that the victim shall enjoy μηδὲ οἴκου, μὴ φωτός, μὴ χρήσεως, μηδὲ κτήσεως. The plur. is applied to ‘‘ windowlights” in P Lond 1179°* (ii/A.p.) (=III. p. 146) φῶτα θυρίδων, and to “‘torches,” as in Ac 167%, in BGU III. 909} (A.D. 359) ἐπελθόντες. . . TH ἡμετέρᾳ οἰκίᾳ καὶ φῶτα ἐπενεγκ[όν]τες ἐνέπρησαν αὐτὴν ἐκ θεματίου. Cf. 20. IV. 120 110 (A.D. 2) where φωτί takes the place οἵ πυρί or φλογί - εὕρωμεν τὰς θύρας τοῦ ἱεροῦ Σαράπειδος θεοῦ μεγίστου ὑφημένας (1 ὑφημμένας) φωτί. This last passage may illustrate Mk 1454 θερμαινόμενος πρὸς τὸ φῶς, where we should translate with the AV ‘‘warmed himself at the ». see C. H. Turner Comm. ad ἢ. in Gore’s New Commentary. The subst. is applied metaph. to those who impart light…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φῶς (phōs) — light.

φῶς,

contraction for φάος, light (which see). φῴς, ἡ, plural φῷδες, contraction from φωΐς (which see).

Strong's Greek Dictionary

φῶς

phos

from an obsolete phao (to shine or make manifest, especially by rays;

compare 5316, 5346); luminousness (in the widest application, natural

or artificial, abstract or concrete, literal or figurative):--fire,

light.

see GREEK for 5316

see GREEK for 5346

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φῶς, φωτός, τό

n.n.

light, a source of light

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φῶς phōs 73x

light, Mt. 17:2; 2 Cor. 4:6; daylight, broad day, Mt. 10:27; Lk. 12:3; radiance, blaze of light, Mt. 4:16; Acts 9:3; 12:7; an instrument or means of light, a light, Mt. 6:23; Acts 16:29; a fire, Mk. 14:54; Lk. 22:56; from the Hebrew, the light of God’s presence, 2 Cor. 11:14; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

lit ('or, ma'or; phos; many other words):

1. Origin of Light

2. A Comprehensive Term

(1) Natural Light

(2) Artificial Light

(3) Miraculous Light

(4) Mental, Moral, Spiritual Light

3. An Attribute of Holiness

(1) God

(2) Christ

(3) Christians

(4) The Church

4. Symbolism

5. Expressive Terms

1. Origin of Light:

The creation of light was the initial step in the creation of life. "Let there be light" (Ge 1:3) was the first word of God spoken after His creative Spirit "moved" upon the primary material out of which He created the heavens and the earth, and which lay, until the utterance of that word, in the chaos of darkness and desolation. Something akin, possibly, to the all-pervasive electro-magnetic activity of the aurora borealis penetrated the chaotic night of the world. The ultimate focusing of light (on the 4th day of creation,

Light

The offspring of the divine command (Gen. 1:3). “All the more joyous emotions of the mind, all the pleasing sensations of the frame, all the happy hours of domestic intercourse were habitually described among the Hebrews under imagery derived from light” (1 Kings 11:36; Isa. 58:8; Esther 8:16; Ps. 97:11). Light came also naturally to typify true religion and the felicity it imparts (Ps. 119:105; Isa. 8:20; Matt. 4:16, etc.), and the glorious inheritance…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

One of the most wonderful, cheering, and useful of all the works of God; called into being on the first of the six days of creation, by his voice: "Let there be light;" and there was light. No object better illustrates whatever is pure, glorious, spiritual, joyful, and beneficent. Hence the beauty and force of the expressions, "God is light," 1Jo 1:5, and "the Father of lights," Jas 1:17; Christ is the "Sun of righteousness," and "the light of the world," Joh 1:9 8:12. So also the word of God is "a light," Ps 119:105; truth and Christians are lights, Joh 3:19 12:36; prosperity is "light," Es 8:16; and heaven is full of…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Created Ge 1:3-5; Isa 45:7; 2Co 4:6

→ Miraculous Mt 17:2; Ac 9:3

→ FIGURATIVE AND SYMBOLICAL 1Ki 11:36; Ps 27:1; 119:105,130; Pr 6:23; Ec 2:13; Isa 8:20; 49:6; 58:8; 60:19,20; Mt 4:16; 5:14,16; Lu 2:32; 11:34; 16:8;

Across the New Testament15 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 102 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 29c. AD 40

εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.27c. AD 75–95

ταύτης δʼ ὑπʼ ὄψιν οὐκ ἐρχομένης, ἀλλὰ βαθεῖ μὲν κρυπτομένης σκότει, πνεύματος δʼ αὐτὴν ἄνωθεν ἐπιθέοντος, γενέσθαι φῶς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ θεός.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 3.4c. AD 100

τότε ῥαγήσεται πρώϊμον τὸ φῶς σου, καὶ τὰ ἱμάτιά σου ταχέως ἀνατελεῖ, καὶ προπορεύσεται ἔμπροσθέν σου ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡ δόξα τοῦ θεοῦ περιστελεῖ σε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 5th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Fay. 213 descr.Euhemeria (Arsinoites)3 BC

Ἀπολλώνιος Ὥρῳ καὶ … φωτι γεωργοῖς χαίρειν· ἀπέχω παρʼ ὑμῶν τὰ ἐκφόρια τοῦ ὀγδόου καὶ εἰκοστοῦ ἔτους ἀφʼ ὧν

BGU 4 1201Busiris (Herakleopolites)AD 2

λειτουργίας καὶ θυσίας τῶν θεῶν εὕρομεν τὰς θύρας τοῦ ἱεροῦ Σαράπειδος θεοῦ μεγίστου ὑφημμένας φωτί. καὶ ἡμῶν ἀνακραξάντων εἰς τὴν κώμην πρὸς βοήθειαν κατεπήδησεν ὁ γυμνασίαρχος τῆς κώμης καὶ

P.Mil.Vogl. 2 99Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 119

ἣν ἐξεν … ρ … αὐτῶν α … … … ὧν κεκλήρωνται θύρας καὶ φῶτα θυρίδων τρία , τὸν δὲ Ὧρον Τεσενούφεως ἑαυτῶι ἀνοίγειν … υ κεκλη

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
τὸho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · neuter
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in 1 John as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSN — Article · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSN Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ἀληθινὸνalēthinos true G228 Adjective · nominative · singular · neuter
28× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
True means being real, genuine, and authentic, like in John 1:9 and 1 Thessalonians 1:9. It describes something or someone that is trustworthy and reliable.
Amplified meaning
real, genuine
Tyndale gloss
true
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀληθινός (transliterated as alēthinos) means true, real, or genuine. It is derived from ἀληθής and is used to describe both people and things that are truthful or correspond to reality. The term appears in various New Testament passages, including Luke and John, where it often contrasts genuine entities with false or counterfeit ones. Notably, Thayer's entry emphasizes its application to God as the true deity, distinguishing Him from idols.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ἀληθής, ἀληθινός from a scan

Tue Latin ‘verax’ and ‘verus’ would severally represent ἀληθής and ἀληθινός, and in the main reproduce the distinctions existing between them; indeed, the Vulgate does commonly by aid of these indicate whether of the two stands in the original; but we having lost, or nearly lost, ‘ very ᾿ (vrai) as an adjective, retaining it only as an adverb, have ‘true’ alone whereby to render them both. It follows that the difference between the two disappears in our Version: and this by no fault of our Translators—unless, indeed, they erred in not recovering ‘very,’ which was Wiclif’s common translation of ‘verus’ (thus John xv. 1, “I am the verrz vine ’’), and which to recover would have been easy in their time (indeed they actually so use it at Gen. xxvii. 21, 24); as it would not be impossible in ours. We in fact do retain it in the Nicene Creed, where it does excellent service— very God of very…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀληθινός, -ή, -όν

(< ἀληθής),

[in LXX for אֶמֶת;]

true, in the sense of real, ideal, genuine: Lk 16:11 Jo 1:9 4:23, 37 6:32 7:28 8:16 15:1 17:3 19:35, I Th 1:9, He 8:2 9:24 10:22, I Jo 2:8 5:20, Re 3:7, 14 6:10 15:3 16:7 19:2; = ἀληθής, Re 19:9 21:5 22:6 (MM, VGT, s.v.).†

SYN.: ἀληθής, q.v

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀληθινός, -7, -dv, (freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato down; [twenty-three times in Jn.’s writ.; only five (ace. to Lchm. six) times in the rest of the N. T.]) ; 1. “that which has not only the name and semblance, but the real nature corresponding to the name” (Tittmann p. 155; [‘‘ particularly applied to express that which is all that it pretends to be, for instance, pure gold as opp. to adulterated metal” Donaldson, New Crat. § 258; see, at length, Trench § viii.]), in every respect corresponding to the idea signified by the name, real and true, genuine; a. opp. to what is fictitious, counterfeit, imaginary, simulated, pretended: θεός (DDN TON, 2 Chr. xv. 3), 1 Th. i. 9; Heb. ix. 14 Lehm.; Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. v. 20. (ἀληθινοὶ φίλοι, Dem. Phil. 3, p. 113, 27.) b. it contrasts realities with their semblances: σκηνή, Heb. viii. 2; the sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24. (ὁ ἵππος contrasted with 6 ἐν τῇ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀληθινός is less common still than ἀληθής, but is found in MGr. In P Petr II. 19 (1a)® (iii/B.c.) it is used in a petition by a prisoner who affirms that he has said nothing μηδέποτε ἄτοπον, ὅπερ καὶ ἀληθινόν ἐστι, and again (s¢ vera Jectio) ε ὔ αλιεὺς 26. 2 (3) (B.C. 260), where the writer assures his father εἰ ἐν ἄϊλλοις ἀλύπως ἀπαλλάσσεις εἴη ἂν ὡς ἐγὼ τοῖς θεοῖς ἔσχομεν [χάριν ἀληθ]ινόν, ““1Γ in other matters you are getting on without annoyances, there will be, as we have given, true gratitude to the gods”: cf. Sy// 316 (ii/B.c.) πα]ρασχομένων τῶν κατηγόρων ἀληθινὰς ἀποδείξεις, and the same phrase in BGU IV. 11417 (time of Augustus). Caracalla’s edict, P Giss I. 40 4-27, speaks of οἱ ἀληθινοὶ Αἰγύπτιοι as ‘easily distinguished by their speech.” The word is also found in the fragmentary BGU III. 742%-1f (A.D. 122) εἰ ταῖς ἀληθ[ι]Ἱναῖς ἀντὶ φερνῆς ἡ παραχώρησις ἐγένετο. In an obscure…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀληθινός (alēthinos) — true.

ἀληθῐνός, ή, όν,

agreeable to truth:

1. of persons, truthful, trusty, στράτευμα, φίλοι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb -νῶς, φιλεῖν[Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative -ώτατα[Refs 2nd c.BC+]

2. of things, true, genuine, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially of purple, πορφυρίς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἰχθύς Amph.26; πέλαγος[Refs 4th c.BC+]; τὰ ἀ. real objects, opposed to τὰ γεγραμμένα, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of persons, ἐς ἀ. ἄνδρ᾽ ἀποβῆναι to turn out a genuine man, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: Astron., true (opposed to φαινόμενος apparent), of risings and settings, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. adverb -νῶς truly, really, opposed to γλίσχρως, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ζῶντα ἀ. really alive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. honestly, straightforwardly, [Refs]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀληθινός

alethinos

from 227; truthful:--true.

see GREEK for 227

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀληθινός, η, ον

Adj

true, real, genuine

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀληθινός alēthinos 28x

sterling, Lk. 16:11; real, Jn. 6:32; 1 Thess. 1:9; unfeigned, trustworthy, true, Jn. 19:35

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀληθινός ἀληθής agreeable to truth:

of persons, truthful, trusty, Xen., Dem.

of things, true, real, Plat.; ἐς ἀλ. ἄνδρ᾽ ἀποβῆναι to turn out a true man, Theocr.:—adv. -νῶς, truly, really, Plat., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSN — Adjective · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
96%true
true96% · 27×sincere4% · 1×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate50%object25%subject18%adverbial7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 28 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
φῶςlight, a source γίνομαιI come into beinὅτεwhen
καίand, even, also, nam
πιστόςtrustworthy, faiμαρτυρέωI witness, testiζάωI live
εἰμίI am, exist
λόγοςa word, speech, ἀλλάbut, except
ἐμός
Article the
μόνοςonly, solitary, deso
Article the
ἀληθινόςtrue28×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theδίκαιοςjust, righteous,εἰμίI am, exist
Article the
πέμπωI sendἔχωI have, hold, poἀρχήruler, beginning
ὅς
φωτίζωI illuminate, brπήγνυμιI pitch a tent
εἰμίI am, exist
ὅτιthat, since, bec
θεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀληθινός · 28× in the New Testament
Revelation John 1 John Hebrews 1 Thessalonians Luke
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 27 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Josephus The Didache The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.32c. AD 40

ὁ δὲ νοῦς οὗτος γεώδης ἐστὶ τῷ ὄντι καὶ φθαρτός, εἰ μὴ ὁ θεὸς ἐμπνεύσειεν αὐτῷ δύναμιν ἀληθινῆς ζωῆς·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.34c. AD 75–95

τοιαύτη γάρ ἐστιν ἡ παρθένος γῆ καὶ ἀληθινή.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 17.3c. AD 96

ἔτι δὲ καὶ περὶ Ἰὼβ οὕτως γέγραπται: Ἰὼβ δὲ ἦν δίκαιος καὶ ἄμεμπτος, ἀληθινός, θεοσεβής, ἀπεχόμενος ἀπὸ παντὸς κακοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
5th c. AD 6th c. AD 8th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Petr. 2 19 (1)Arsinoites301 BC–202 BC

δοὺς τὰ πιστὰ Μηζάκωι μηθέν με εἰρηκέναι σοι καθʼ αὐτοῦ μηδέποτε ἄτοπον ὅπερ καὶ ἀληθινόν ἐστιν καὶ ὡς ἂν τοῦτο ποιήσηις ἀξιώσας αὐτὸν μεταπέμψασθαί με καὶ διέσθαι με ἐκ

P.Hamb. 1 37AD 101–AD 200

ἐστι μιμνήσκεσθαι τῆς καλοκαγαθίας σου καὶ τοῦ ἤθους σου τοῦ ἀληθινοῦ φιλοσόφου. σὺ γὰρ ἀληθινὸς φιλόσοφος καὶ εὐσχήμων γεγένησαι … … … τῇ δίκῃ καὶ ἡμεῖς ὑπὸ σοῦ βέλτιον

CdÉ 43 (1968), p. 338Oxyrhynchos ?AD 226–AD 275

r Φοῦσκος Σαραπίωνι τῶι ἀληθινῷ μωρῷ πλεῖστα χαίρειν. πολλά σοι ἐνετειλάμην ἀναπλεῦσαι τῶι Παχὼν μηνὶ καὶ μέχρι τούτου λέγεταί

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
ἤδηēdē already G2235 Adverb
60× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Already or even now is the meaning of this word, which is used to describe something that has happened or is happening at the current time. It is used in Matthew 3:10 and John 4:36 to describe events that are happening now or have already occurred.
Amplified meaning
even now, at this moment
Tyndale gloss
already
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἤδη (i.e., *ēdē*) is an adverb meaning 'now' or 'already.' It is used in the New Testament to indicate a present time or state, as seen in verses like Matthew 3:10 and Romans 1:10. The word can also imply immediacy or logical proximity, with variations such as 'νῦν... ἤδη' (now already) and 'ἤδη ποτέ' (now at length).

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἤδη

adv.,

in NT, always of time; now, already: Mt 3:10, Mk 4:37, Lk 7:6, Jo 4:36, al.; νῦν . . . ἤ., now already, I Jo 4:3; ἤ. ποτέ, now at length, c. fut., Ro 1:10 (cf. ἄρτι).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἤδη, adv., [fr. Hom. down; on deriv. see Vanitek p. 745; Peile p. 395], in the N. T. everywh. of time, now, already, (Lat. jam): Mt. iii. 10; v. 28; xiv.15; Mk. iv. 37; ΧΙ. 11; Lk. vii. 6; xii. 49; [xxiv. 29 T WH Trtxt., L Tr mrg. br.]; Jn. iv. 35 (36), 51; xix. 28 (that all things were now finished and that nothing further remained for him to do or to suffer); Acts xxvii. 9; Ro. xiii. 11 (that it is already time to wake up and indulge no longer in sleep); 1 Co. iv. 8, and often; νῦν... ἤδη, now already (Lat. jam nunc): 1 Jn. iv. 3; ἤδη ποτέ, now at last, at length now: with fut. Ro. i. 10; [with aor. Phil. iv. 10. Syn. see ἄρτι, fin.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἤδη. For the idea of ‘logical proximity and immediateness ”’ (cf. Baumlein Griech. Partikeln, p. 138 ff.) which underlies this word and is perhaps to be seen in 1 Cor 67 (cf. Ellicott ad /.), we may cite the common use of the adverb in magical incantations, e.g. P Par 574128 (iii/A.p.) (= Selectzons, p. 114) ἔξελθε, δαῖμον, .. . καὶ ἀπόστηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ S(c)i(va) ἄρτι ἄρτι ἤδη, P Lond 121978 (iii/A.p.) (ΞΞ 1. p. 96) ἐν [τ]ῇ ἄρτι ὥρᾳ ἤδη ἤδη ταχὺ ταχύ: see also Deissmann ZS, p. 289, Archiv i. p. 426. Other examples of the word are P Fay 109! (early i/A.D.) τοὺς τρεῖς στατῆρες (/. -ας) ods εἴρηκέ σοι Σέλευκος δῶναί por ἤδη δὸς Κλέωνι, ‘the three staters which S. told you to give me, now give to C.,” P Ryl II. 7748 (a.p. 192) κα[ὶ] ὀφείλει στεφῆναι, ἤδη yap ἡ ἀρχὴ ἀδιάπτωτός ἐστιν τῇ πόλί(ει), ‘and he ought to be crowned, for the office is now secured to the city” (Edd.). For ἤδη οὖν see P…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἤδη (ēdē) — already.

ἤδη,

adverb:

1. already, by this time, νὺξ ἤ. τελέθει 'tis already night, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: with numerals, ἤ. γὰρ τρίτον ἔτος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἦν δ᾽ ἦμαρ ἤ. δεύτερον[Refs]

2. forthwith, immediately, φρονέω δὲ διακρινθήμεναι ἤ. Ἁργείους καὶ Τρῶας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; στείχοις ἂν ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἤδη.. στέλλεσθ; [Refs]; μετὰ τοῦτ᾽ ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἤ. ποτέ now at length, Mitteis [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; on the verso of a letter, urgent, immediate, PCair. Zen.154 [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἤ. ἤ. ταχὺ ταχύ [Refs]

3. opposed to to the future or past, actually, now, οὐκ ὄναρ, ἀλλ᾽ ὕπαρ ἤ. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οἱ μὲν τάχ᾽, οἱ δ᾽ ἐσαῦθις, οἱ δ᾽ ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οὐ τάχ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ ἤ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἤ. χάρις present…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἤδη

ede

apparently from 2228 (or possibly 2229) and 1211; even now:--already,

(even) now (already), by this time.

see GREEK for 2228

see GREEK for 2229

see GREEK for 1211

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἤδη

Adv

now, already

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἤδη ēdē 62x

before now, now, already, Mt. 3:10; 5:28; ἤδη ποτέ, at length, Rom. 1:10; Phil. 4:10

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
84%already
already84% · 51×now15% · 9×other renderings2% · 1×

61 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 60 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὅτιthat, since, because
ὄχλοςa crowdἔρχομαιI come, goγινώσκωI come to know,
εἰμίI am, exist
καίand, even, also,κορέννυμιI fill, feed fulκόσμοςthe world, unive
αὐτός
ἐπιθυμέωI long for, coveσύνδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
τόποςa place
ὥραan hour, season
Article theὅτιthat, since, bec
ἤδηalready60×
what comes after →
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theαὐτόςκαίand, even, also,
Article the
κλάδοςa branchθύραa door, opportunἡμέραa day
ἡμέραa day
τρεῖςthreeἔχωI have, hold, po
γίνομαιI come into being, a
καίand, even, also,ἵστημιI cause to stand
παρέρχομαιI pass by
ἀπολύωI release, let gπαραινέωI admonish, advi

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἤδη · 60× in the New Testament
John Luke Mark Matthew 1 Corinthians Acts Philippians 1 John 2 Timothy Romans 1 Timothy 2 Peter
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 12 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 24c. AD 40

εἰ δέ τις ἐθελήσειε γυμνοτέροις χρήσασθαι τοῖς ὀνόμασιν, οὐδὲν ἂν ἕτερον εἴποι τὸν νοητὸν κόσμον εἶναι ἢ θεοῦ λόγον ἤδη κοσμοποιοῦντος·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.6c. AD 75–95

ἤδη μὲν οὖν καὶ πρότερον διενοήθην, ὅτε τὸν πόλεμον συνέγραφον, δηλῶσαι τίνες ὄντες ἐξ ἀρχῆς Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ τίσι χρησάμενοι τύχαις ὑφʼ οἵῳ τε παιδευθέντες νομοθέτῃ τὰ πρὸς εὐσέβειαν καὶ τὴν ἄλλην ἄσκησιν ἀρετῆς πόσους τε πολέμους ἐν μακροῖς…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.7c. AD 100

ἡμῶν μέν: ἀλλ̓ ἐκεῖνοι οὕτως εἰς τέλος ἀπώλεσαν αὐτὴν λαβόντος ἤδη τοῦ Μωϋσέως.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59331Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)249 BC

πρὸς αὐτοὺς περὶ τιμῆς … … σοι πλῆθός τι εἰς ρν δέλφακας διὰ τὸ ἤδη ἐκ … ναι ἕως λ τοῦ Παχώνς· καὶ ἀπόστειλον πε … … ων ἐν

τοῦ παλαιοῦ, ὄξους α, εἰ δὲ μὴ ὑπάρχει τοῦ παλαιοῦ, τοῦ νέου, εἰ ἔστιν ἤδη χρηστόν. ἔρρωσο. ἔτους γ, Μεσορὴ ζ.

P.Grenf. 1 42Diospolis Parva170 BC–169 BC

μικρᾶι ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν τῶι ἐν Πτολεμαίδι ὑπαίθρωι. πολλὰς χρείας μισθοφόρων ἱππέων παρεσχημένων ἡμῶν ἤδη πολλάκις κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον καὶ κινδύνους μεγάλους … ἐνηνοχότων ἐν τοῖς μάλιστʼ ἀναγκαιοτάτοις καιροῖς

Again a commandment new I am writing to you which is true in Him and in you, because the darkness is passing away and the light <the> true already shines.
φαίνει.phainō shines. G5316 Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
31× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in 1 John than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to shine or appear, and can be used literally or figuratively, as in John 1:5 and 2 Peter 1:19. It can also mean to bring something to light or make it visible, like in Matthew 2:7 and Hebrews 11:3.
Amplified meaning
radiating, illuminating
Tyndale gloss
to shine/appear
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

φαίνω (phaino) means to bring to light or cause to appear, and can also mean to shine or be seen. It is used in various contexts, from physical light to metaphorical appearances in thoughts or judgments. The New Testament employs it in verses such as John 1:5 and Matthew 1:20, indicating both literal and figurative senses. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its passive forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

φαίνω

[in LXX for אור hi., ראה ni., etc. ;]

Act.,

to bring to light, cause to appear (so most freq. in cl.).

Absol., to give light, shine (Hom., Plat., al.): Jo 1:5 5:35, II Pe 1:19, I Jo 2:8, Re 1:16 8:12 18:23 21:23.

Pass., to come to light, appear, be manifest: Mt 2:7 13:26 24:27, 30, Lk 9:8, Phl 2:15, He 11:3, I Pe 4:18 (LXX); opp. to ἀφανίζεσθαι, Ja 4:14; c. dat. pers. (Bl. § 54, 4), Mt 1:20 2:13, 19, Mk 16:9; c. nom. pred.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

φαίνω; [1 aor. act. subjune. 3 pers. sing. avy, LT WH in Rev. viii. 12; xviii. 23, (see below and dvadaivw; W §15 5. v.; B.41(35))]; Pass., pres. φαίνομαι; 2 aor. ἐφάνην; 2 fut. φανήσομαι and (in 1 Pet. iv. 18) φανοῦμαι (cf. Kithner § 343s. v.; [Veitchs.v.]); (φάω) ; in Grk. writ. fr. Hom. down; to bring forth into the light, cause to shine; to show. In bibl. Grk. 1. Active intransitively, to shine, shed light, (which the Grks. [commonly (cf. L. and S.s. ν. A. IT.)] express by the passive), Sept. for VND: τὸ φῶς φαίνει, Jn. i. 5; 1 Jn. ii. 8; ὁ λύχνος, Jn. v. 85; 2 Pet. i. 19, (1 Mace. iv. 50; Gen. i. 17); ὁ ἥλιος, Rev. i. 16 ; ὁ ἥλ. καὶ ἡ σελήνη, Rev. xxi. 23; ἡ ἡμέρα, Rey. viii. 12 Ree. 2. Passive, a. to shine, be bright or resplendent: ἡ ἡμέρα, Rev. viii. 12 Tr [(see above); xviii. 23 RG Tr—but see Veitchs.v.; moreover, the foll. exx. should be brought under the next head; see Meyer…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

φαίνω (phainō) — to shine/appear.

φαίνω,

[Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect also φαείνω (which see):—future φᾰνῶ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect φᾰνέω (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.BC+], optative φᾰνοίην [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔφηνα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἔφᾱνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]subjunctive, ἀπο-φάνῃ uncertain reading in [Refs]; φάνῃς [Refs 4th c.BC+]; so in late Prose, (ἐξ-) [NT+2nd c.AD+]; Epic dialect iterative φάνεσκε (intransitive) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πέφαγκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]perfect πέφηνα (see. below[Refs], Doric dialect3rd.pers. plural ἐκ-πεφάναντι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; pluperfect ἐπεφήνειν [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—middle, future infinitive φᾰνεῖσθαι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect φᾰνέομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; the forms φανῆσθον and Doric dialect imperative φάνευ are corrupt in [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 1 ἐφηνάμην (transitive) [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, Ionic dialect imperfect…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

φαίνω

phaino

prolongation for the base of 5457; to lighten (shine), i.e. show

(transitive or intransitive, literal or figurative):-- appear, seem,

be seen, shine, X think.

see GREEK for 5457

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

φαίνω

v.

I shine, appear, seem

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

φαίνω phainō 31x

to cause to appear, bring to light; absol. to shine, Jn. 1:5; 5:35; 2 Pet. 1:19; 1 Jn. 2:8; Rev. 1:16; 8:12; 21:23; mid./pass. to be seen, appear, be visible, Mt. 1:20; 2:7, 13, 19; τὰ φαινόμενα, things visible, things obvious to the senses, Heb. 11:3; φαίνομαι, to appear, seen, be in appearance, Mt. 23:27; Lk. 24:11; to appear in thought, seen in idea, be a notion, Mk.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

φαίνω φάω Act. to bring to light, make to appear, Hom., etc.:—Mid. to exhibit as one's own, Soph.

to shew forth, make known, reveal, disclose, shew, Od., Soph. etc.: γόνον Ἑλένηι φ. to shew her a child, i. e. grant her to bear one, Od.

of sound, to make it clear to the ear, make it ring clear, id. Od., Aesch.

to make clear, explain, expound, Hdt.

in attic to inform against one, to indict, impeach, Ar.:— to inform of a thing as contraband, id. Ar.: Pass., τὰ φανθέντα articles informed against as contraband, Dem.

absol. to give information, Xen.

φαίνειν φρουράν at Sparta, to proclaim a levy, call out the array, id. Xen.

absol. to give light, Od.; so of the sun, moon, etc., φ. τινί Ar., Theocr.; so of the Dioscuri shining in mid-air, Eur.; ἀγανὴ φαίνουσ᾽ ἐλπίς soft shining hope, Aesch.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singular
present active indicative — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
10%shining
shining10% · 3×shines10% · 3×appeared10% · 3×may appear6% · 2×appearing6% · 2×appears6% · 2×appear6% · 2×it may be shown as3% · 1×other renderings42% · 13×

31 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 21 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb81%linking verb13%object3%adverbial3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 31 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
μήNeg
ὅπωςhow, in order thἡμέραa dayοὐNeg
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀνατολήrising of the suκαίωI ignite, light,
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἄγγελοςan angel, messen
ὅπωςhow, in order that,
προσεύχομαιI pray, pray forαὐτός
τότεthen
ποιέωI do, makeκαίand, even, also,
φαίνωshines.31×
what comes after →
Article the
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thσημεῖονa sign, miracle,δέbut, on the othe
ἐν
αὐχμηρόςdingy, dusky, obArticle theσύ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakArticle the
κατά
ὄναρindcl
καίand, even, also, nam
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceφαίνω · 31× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation John Luke Mark 1 John 1 Peter 2 Corinthians 2 Peter Hebrews James Philippians
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 26 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 141c. AD 40

ὅμοιον δή τι πεπονθέναι καὶ τὸ γένος τῶν ἀνθρώπων φαίνεται καθ’ ἑκάστην γενεὰν ἀμυδροτέρας λαμβανόντων τάς τε τοῦ σώματος καὶ τὰς τῆς ψυχῆς δυνάμεις καὶ ποιότητας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.24c. AD 75–95

φανεῖται γὰρ σκοπουμένοις οὕτως οὐδὲν οὔτʼ ἄλογον αὐτοῖς οὔτε πρὸς τὴν μεγαλειότητα τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τὴν φιλανθρωπίαν ἀνάρμοστον·

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 12.4c. AD 96

ὃν τρόπον οὖν σου τὸ σῶμα φαίνεται, οὕτως καὶ ἡ ψυχή σου δῆλος ἔστω ἐν τοῖς καλοῖς ἔργοις.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Athen.. 19ArsinoitesAD 153

καιρῷ. λήμψομαι δὲ τὰ ἐκ δημοσίου χρήματα καὶ σπέρματα· βεβαίωσις ἥδε … λοιπῶν τὰ φαίνονται καὶ ἐπιτελέσω τὰ τῆς κληρουχίας γεωργικὰ ἔργα πάντα ὅσα καθήκει· ἐὰν φαίνηται μισθῶσαι. Ὄννωφρις

P.Cair. Isid. 101ArsinoitesAD 300

καὶ μετὰ τὸν χρόνον παραδώσω τὰς ἀρούρας ἀπὸ καλάμης καθὼς καὶ ἐγὼ παρέλαβα, ἐὰν φαίνεται μισθῶσαι. καὶ ἐπερωτηθεῖσα ὡμολόγησα. Αὐρηλία Σερηνίλλα διʼ ἐμοῦ Ζωίλου υἱοῦ μεμίσθωκα ὡς πρόκιται. Αὐρήλιοι

P.Col. 7 179Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 300

τὸν χρόνον παραδώσω τὸν ἐλαιῶνα τετευχότα τῶν δε… πάντων ὡς καὶ ἐγὼ παρέλαβον, ἐὰν φαίνεται μισθῶσαι. καὶ ἐπερωτηθεὶς ὡμολόγησα. αὐρηλία Θερμουθᾶρις μεμίσθωκα ἐπὶ ἡμίσει μέρει ὡς πρόκιται. Αὐρήλιος Μίκκαλος

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate